Agenda packet — Redlands City Council, October 21, 2025 (part 7 of 8)

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Cantex Inc.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 11
100% Design Submittal
c. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
d. Topaz Lighting & Electric.
e. Or equal.

3. Options:
a. Degree of Protection: As per Drawings.

M. UL BGUZ - Outdoor Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. b. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. Hubbell Industrial Controls; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
e. Square D; Schneider Electric USA.
f. Or equal.

3. Options:
a. Degree of Protection As per Drawings .

N. UL BGUZ - Outdoor Cast-Metal Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Adalet.
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
e. Or equal.

3. Options:
a. Degree of Protection: .

O. UL BGUZ - Outdoor Polymeric Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 12
100% Design Submittal

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Cantex Inc.
c. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
d. Topaz Lighting & Electric.

3. Options:
a. Degree of Protection: As per Drawings.

2.10 COVER PLATES FOR DEVICES BOXES
A. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and use.

2. Listing Criteria: UL CCN QCIT or UL CCN QCMZ; including UL 514D.

3. Wallplate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match wallplate finish.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

C. UL QCIT or QCMZ - Metallic Cover Plates for Device Boxes:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. d. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
e. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
g. Or equal.

2. Options:
a. Damp and Wet Locations: Listed, labeled, and marked for location and use.

Provide gaskets and accessories necessary for compliance with listing. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 13
100% Design Submittal
b. Wallplate Material: 0.040 inch thick aluminum, anodized or lacquered to prevent corrosion Cast aluminum.

D. UL QCIT or QCMZ - Nonmetallic Cover Plates for Device Boxes:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Appleton; Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions. c. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. d. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
e. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
g. Or equal.

2. Options:
a. Damp and Wet Locations: Listed, labeled, and marked for location and use.

Provide gaskets and accessories necessary for compliance with listing. b. Wallplate Material: 0.060 inch thick, high-impact thermoplastic (nylon) with smooth finish and color matching wiring device.
c. Color: White in accordance with NEMA WD 1 or as indicated on architectural Drawings.

E. UL QCIT or QCMZ - Illuminating Cover Plates for Device Boxes:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. Or equal.

2. Options:
a. Damp and Wet Locations: Listed, labeled, and marked for location and use.

Provide gaskets and accessories necessary for compliance with listing. b. Wallplate Material: 0.060 inch thick, high-impact thermoplastic (nylon) with smooth finish and color matching wiring device or as indicated on architectural Drawings.
c. Color: White in accordance with NEMA WD 1 or as indicated on architectural Drawings.

2.11 HOODS FOR OUTLET BOXES
A. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and use.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 14
100% Design Submittal

2. Listing Criteria:
a. UL CCN QCIT or UL CCN QCMZ; including UL 514D.
b. Receptacle, Hood, Cover Plate, Gaskets, and Seals: UL 498 Supplement SA when mated with box or enclosure complying with UL 514A, UL 514C, or UL 50E.

3. Mounts to box using fasteners different from wiring device.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

C. UL QCIT or QCMZ - Retractable or Reattachable Hoods for Outlet Boxes:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Raco Taymac Bell; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. Or equal.

2. Options:
a. Provides clear, weatherproof, "while-in-use" cover.

D. UL QCIT or QCMZ - Extra-Duty, While-in-Use Hoods for Outlet Boxes:

2. Additional Characteristics: Marked "Extra-Duty" in accordance with UL 514D.

3. Options:
a. Provides clear, weatherproof, "while-in-use" cover.
b. Manufacturer may combine nonmetallic device box with hood as extra-duty rated assembly.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 15
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SELECTION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with NFPA 70 for selection of boxes and enclosures. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements.

B. Conduit bodies: Match associated conduit type.

C. Outlet boxes recessed in walls or indoors exposed in non-process ceiling areas: Pressed steel.

D. Exposed outlet and device boxes: Cast metal except where PVC-80 is used. Use PVC coated cast metal when conduit is PVC coated. Use non-metallic when PVC-80 is used.

E. Junction and pull boxes: Suitable for the location and conform to the NEMA enclosure ratings and material descriptions included on Drawings. Where no size is indicated, size in accordance with NEC Article 314.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Special Installation Techniques:

1. Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures.

2. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

3. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box, whether installed indoors or outdoors.

4. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same vertical channel.

5. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

6. Support boxes in recessed ceilings independent of ceiling tiles and ceiling grid.

7. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for purpose.

8. Fasten junction and pull boxes to, or support from, building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

9. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

10. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

11. Do not install aluminum boxes, enclosures, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

12. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to ensure a continuous ground path.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.16 - 16
100% Design Submittal

13. Identification: Install labels and nameplates in accordance with Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove construction dust and debris from boxes before installing wallplates, covers, and hoods.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. After installation, protect boxes from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 260533.16
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260533.23 - SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Surface type raceways including wireways and troughs and auxiliary gutters.

1. Surface metal raceways and fittings.

2. Surface nonmetallic raceways.

3. Strut-type channel raceways and fittings.

4. Wireways and auxiliary gutters.

B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section:

1. See Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for electrical equipment labels.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260010 "Supplemental Requirements for Electrical" for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s cut sheet for each type of product used on project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

B. Listing Criteria as Applicable:

1. UL 94 – Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 2
100% Design Submittal

2. UL 870 – Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.

3. UL CCN ZOYX – Wireway, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.

2.2 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Metallic:

1. NEMA 1 Type: Painted steel, gasketed, hinged cover, stainless steel hardware. Square Duct as manufactured by Schneider Electric or equal.

2. NEMA 4X Type: Stainless steel, Type 316, gasketed, hinged and clamped cover with drip lip, stainless steel hardware. Hoffman Bulletin F22 by nVent or equal.

B. Nonmetallic:

1. NEMA 3R Type: Fiberglass, gasketed, hinged cover, stainless steel hardware. Hoffman Fiberglass Hinged-Cover Wiring Trough by nVent or equal.

2.3 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

2. Listing Criteria: UL CCN RJBT; including UL 5.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

3. Samples:
a. Surface Metallic Raceway Nonmetallic Cover Samples for Initial Selection:

Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type, 12 inch (300 mm) or as indicated on Drawings .

C. UL RJBT - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings with Metal Covers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
b. MonoSystems, Inc.
c. Wiremold; Legrand North America, LLC.
d. Or equal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2. Options:
a. Aluminum base with snap-on covers.
b. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. c. Wiring Channels: Single, Dual, or Triple. Multiple channels must be capable of housing a standard 20 to 30 A device flush within the raceway.

D. UL RJBT - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings with Nonmetallic Covers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Union Products International, Inc.
b. Or equal.

2. Additional Characteristics: UL 94, V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.

3. Options:
a. Aluminum base with snap-on covers.
b. Provide texture and color selected by Architect from custom colors. c. Wiring Channels: Single, Dual, or Triple. Multiple channels must be capable of housing a standard 20 to 30 A device flush within the raceway.

2.4 SURFACE NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS
A. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. UL CCN RJTX; including UL 5A.
b. UL 94, V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

3. Samples:
a. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type, dimension as per Drawings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. UL RJTX - Surface Nonmetallic Raceways and Fittings with Nonmetallic Covers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. HellermannTyton.
b. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
c. Panduit Corp.
d. Wiremold; Legrand North America, LLC.
e. Or equal.

2. Options:
a. Provide texture and color selected by Architect from custom colors. b. Wiring Channels: Single or Dual. Multiple channels must be capable of housing a standard 20 to 30 A device flush within the raceway.

D. UL RJTX - Surface Nonmetallic Raceways and Fittings with Metallic Covers:

2. Options:
a. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. b. Wiring Channels: Single or Dual. Multiple channels must be capable of housing a standard 20 to 30 A device flush within the raceway.

2.5 STRUT-TYPE CHANNEL RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. UL CCN RIUU; including UL 5B.
b. UL 94, V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

3. Samples:
a. Strut-Type Channel Raceway Nonmetallic Covers for Initial Selection:

Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type, dimension as per Drawings.

C. UL RIUU - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings with Metallic Covers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Atkore Unistrut.
c. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
d. Power-Strut; Atkore International.
e. Or equal.

2. Options:
a. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

D. UL RIUU - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings with Nonmetallic Covers:

2. Additional Characteristics: UL 94, V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.

3. Options:
a. Provide texture and color selected by Architect from custom colors. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 6
100% Design Submittal

2.6 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Performance Criteria:

2. Listing Criteria:
a. UL CCN ZOYX; including UL 870.
b. UL 94, V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.

B. Source Quality Control:

1. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

2. Manufacturer's Published Instructions: Prepare and submit installation, testing, and operating instructions for product.

3. Samples:
a. Nonmetallic Wireway and Auxiliary Gutter Samples for Initial Selection:

Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type, dimensions as per Drawings.

C. UL ZOYX - Metal Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ABB, Electrification Business.
b. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
d. Square D; Schneider Electric USA.
e. Or equal.

2. Additional Characteristics:
a. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

3. Degree of protection:
a. Type 1 gasketed unless otherwise indicated.
b. Locations Exposed to Corrosive Agents: Type 4X.
c. Damp or Dusty Locations: Type 12.:
d. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 7
100% Design Submittal
D. UL ZOYX - Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
b. Or equal.

2. Additional Characteristics:
a. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings must match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
b. PVC Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by wireway manufacturer.

3. Options:
a. Material:
1) Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover must be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance.

Connections must be flanged and have stainless steel screws and oilresistant gaskets. 2) PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snapon cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with the following:

1. Auxiliary Gutters: Article 366 of NFPA 70.

2. Metal Wireways: Article 376 of NFPA 70.

3. Surface Metal Raceway: Article 386 of NFPA 70.

4. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway: Article 388 of NFPA 70.

C. Special Installation Techniques:

1. Install surface raceways or wireways and gutters as indicated on Drawings or when approved by Engineer.

2. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

3. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2 inch radius control at bend points.

4. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260533.23 - 8
100% Design Submittal
Support surface raceway in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Tape and glue are unacceptable support methods.

5. Identification: Provide labels for surface raceways and associated electrical equipment.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove construction dust and debris from surface raceways before installing wires and again when installing covers.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. After installation, protect surface raceways from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 260533.23
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Handholes and Duct accessories.

B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section:

1. Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems” for conduits.

2. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for underground-line warning tape.

C. Related Requirements:

2. Division 03 for concrete and reinforcing steel.

3. Division 31 for groundwater control, trenching, excavation and backfilling including gravel and sand bedding, and surface restoration.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct: A single raceway or multiple raceways, installed singly or as components of a duct bank.

B. Duct Bank: Two or more ducts installed in parallel, direct buried or with additional casing materials such as concrete.

C. Handhole: An underground chamber containing electrical cables, sized such that personnel are not required to enter in order to access the cables.

D. Manhole: An underground chamber containing electrical cables and equipment, sized to provide access with working space clearances.

E. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.

2. Include accessories for handholes.

3. Include underground-line warning tape.

4. Duct accessories.

5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground wiring.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Handholes:
a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and accessories. b. Include duct entry provisions showing locations and duct sizes. c. Include frame, cover, entry extensions if applicable, and grounding details. d. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps.

2. Underground Conduit Layouts: In accordance with Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems.”

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality control reports.

B. Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete handholes, as required by ASTM C858.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems” for conduits and fittings.

2.2 DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Spacers: Factory-fabricated, rigid, PVC interlocking spacers; sized for type and size of duct with which used and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting duct during concreting or backfilling.

B. Underground-Line Warning Tape: In accordance with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover must form top of enclosure and must have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

1. Load Rating: Class H-20.

2. Cover Legend: “ELECTRIC”, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Comply with details shown on Drawings.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Oldcastle Infrastructure.

C. Comply with ASTM C 858 “Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures” for design and manufacturing process.

D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Performance Criteria:

1. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and use.

2. General Characteristics:
a. ASTM C858 for design and manufacturing processes.
b. SCTE 77.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Product Data: Prepare and submit catalog cuts, brochures, diagrams, schedules, and performance data illustrating size, physical appearance, and other characteristics of product.

1. Duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.

2. Ducts, conduits, and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement.

3. Accessories for handholes, boxes.

4. Underground-line warning tape.

5. Warning planks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 4
100% Design Submittal
A. Coordinate layout and installation of duct, duct bank, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in field. Notify Engineer if there is conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of duct and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct and duct bank will drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Engineer.

3.2 SELECTION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS
A. Direct Buried Duct: Type PVC-80 rigid non-metallic conduit, with RMC long radius sweep elbows.

B. Concrete Encased Duct: Type PVC-40 rigid non-metallic conduit, with RMC long radius sweep elbows.

C. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) type in accordance with Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems” with two coats of bitumastic paint or PVC coated where:

1. Direct buried conduit enters buildings, structures, and vaults (except manholes and handholes) with not less than a 10-foot length of conduit.

2. Direct buried conduits run below floor slabs in slab-on-grade construction.

3. Stub-ups outdoors or through concrete slabs.

3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 312000 "Earthwork," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restoration: Restore area immediately after backfilling is completed or after construction vehicle traffic in immediate area is complete.

C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and re-establish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

D. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching.

E. Cut and patch existing pavement in path of underground duct, duct bank, and underground structures.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS AND DUCT BANKS
A. Reference Standards:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 5
100% Design Submittal

1. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with NEMA TCB 2 for installation of underground ducts and duct banks.

2. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements.

B. General Requirements:

1. Comply with installation requirements for conduits in Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems” and as supplemented herein.

2. Ductbank routing and manhole / handhole locations indicated on Drawings are diagrammatically depicted. Coordinate with other utilities, yard piping, yard structures and field conditions to determine required paths and depths at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Where conditions do not allow neat and consistent duct bank cross sections in accordance with Drawings due to existing underground conflicts, provide Engineer with proposed solution for approval that complies with minimum NEC installation cover requirements.

For example, where the Drawings indicate direct buried PVC conduits are to be installed at a certain depth below finished grade, a concrete cap or concrete encasement may be permitted to achieve an equivalent protection. Do not deviate from Drawing details without Engineer approval.

4. Reinforce ductbanks as indicated on Drawings. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

5. Separate underground copper signal conduits (instrumentation and telecommunication) from power conduits by a minimum of 12 inches unless noted otherwise. Keep crossing of these conduits to a minimum; cross at 90-degree angles.

6. Plug conduit ends during and after installation to prevent water, mud, and debris from entering conduit.

7. After duct installation is complete and before any cables are pulled, remove obstructions using appropriately sized mandrel for conduits 2 inch and larger. Swab clean interior of all sized conduits. Refer to CLEANING Article.

C. Special Techniques:

1. Where indicated on Drawings, install duct, spacers, and accessories into duct-bank configuration shown. Duct installation requirements in this Section also apply to duct bank.

2. Slope: Pitch duct minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope duct from high point between two manholes to drain in both directions.

3. Curves and Bends: Use long radius elbows, sweeps, and offsets for 2 inch and larger conduits.

4. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in nonmetallic duct and fittings and make watertight in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent duct do not lie in same plane.

5. Terminations at Manholes: Use end bells for PVC conduit and insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type lugs for RMC.

6. Building Wall Penetrations: Make transition from underground duct to RMC at least 10 feet outside building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from building and without forming trap in line. Use fittings manufactured for transition to RMC type installed. Install RMC penetrations of building walls as specified in drawings. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 6
100% Design Submittal

7. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Bury underground line specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" above concrete-encased duct and direct buried duct banks as shown on detail Drawings. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally across width of ducts.

8. Ground ducts and duct banks in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Concrete-Encased Ducts and Duct Bank Special Techniques:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Section 312000 "Earthwork" for pipes 6 inches or less in nominal diameter.

2. Depth: Install so top of duct envelope is as shown on detail Drawing.

3. Support duct on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

4. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of duct, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet of duct. Place spacers within 24 inches of duct ends. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and to duct to prevent floating during concreting. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

6. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.
a. Start at one end and finish at other, allowing for expansion and contraction of duct as its temperature changes during and after pour. Use expansion fittings installed in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.
b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in vertical plane and install 3/4 inch reinforcing-rod dowels extending minimum of 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

7. Pouring Concrete: Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between duct and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow around duct and rise up in middle, uniformly filling open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-installation application.

8. Concrete Color: Red. Dye color added to concrete during batching; or dye mixed with water and applied to top of ductbank with a sprayer while concrete is wet (prior to curing); or raked into the exposed top layer of concrete.

E. Direct-Buried Duct and Duct Bank Special Techniques:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earthwork" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inch in nominal diameter.

2. Depth: Install top of duct as shown on detail Drawing. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3. Support ducts on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

4. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of duct, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet of duct. Place spacers within 24 inches of duct ends. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during backfill. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

5. After installing first tier of duct, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over duct and hand tamp.

Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earthwork" for installation of backfill materials.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE
A. Special Techniques:

1. Install boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting duct, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of duct, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2 inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

3. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade..

4. Install boxes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

5. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

6. Field cut openings for duct in accordance with enclosure manufacturer's published instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

7. Ground boxes in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Nonconforming Work:

1. Underground ducts, raceways, and structures will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

2. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

B. Field Quality-Control Reports: Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260543 - 8
100% Design Submittal

3.7 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of duct until duct cleaner indicates that duct is clear of dirt and debris. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

1. Sweep floor, removing dirt and debris.

2. Remove foreign material.

END OF SECTION 260543
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260548 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Restraints - rigid type.

3. Restraints - cable type.

4. Restraint accessories.

5. Post-installed concrete anchors.

6. Concrete inserts.

B. Not all components specified in this Section are necessarily utilized on this project. Verify components needed per Drawings and Specifications.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 018829 “Seismic Performance Requirements” for submittals, performance requirements and installation.

2. Section 260010 "Supplemental Requirements for Electrical" for additional abbreviations, definition, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section.

3. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads: .

1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. Neoprene rubber, silicone rubber, or other elastomeric material.

4. Surface Pattern: Smooth, ribbed, or waffle pattern.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260548 - 2
100% Design Submittal

2.2 RESTRAINTS - RIGID TYPE
A. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of ANSI/AISI S110-07-S1 slotted steel channels, ANSI/ASTM A53/A53M steel pipe, or other rigid steel brace member. Includes accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.3 RESTRAINTS - CABLE TYPE
A. Seismic- and Wind-Load-Restraint Cables: ASTM A492 stainless steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for seismicrestraining cable service; with fittings attached by means of poured socket, swaged socket, or mechanical (Flemish eye) loop.

B. Restraint cable assembly and cable fittings must comply with ASCE/SEI 19. Cable fittings and complete cable assembly must maintain the minimum cable breaking force. U-shaped cable clips and wedge-type end fittings do not comply and are unacceptable.

2.4 RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Non-metallic stiffeners are unacceptable.

B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

C. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.5 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Mechanical Anchor Bolts:

1. Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488/E488M.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts:

1. Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260548 - 3
100% Design Submittal
and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488/E488M.

C. Provide post-installed concrete anchors that have been prequalified for use in seismic and windload applications.

1. Prequalify post-installed anchors in concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 or other approved qualification testing procedures.

2. Prequalify post-installed anchors in masonry in accordance with approved qualification procedures.

D. Expansion-type anchor bolts are not permitted for equipment in excess of 10 hp that is not vibration isolated.

1. Undercut expansion anchors are permitted.

2.6 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. Provide preset concrete inserts that are seismically prequalified in accordance with ICCES AC446 testing.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic and/or wind restraint components in accordance with Division 01 requirements.

END OF SECTION 260548
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260548 - 4
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Identification products along with color and legend requirements.

B. Related Requirements:

1. .

2. Section 260573 “Power System Studies” for arc flash study labels.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Note that not all products listed may be utilized on this project.

B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 for color identification of hazards; 29 CFR 1910.145 for danger, caution, warning, and safety instruction signs and tags; and the following where applicable:

1. Fire-protection and fire-alarm equipment, including raceways, must be finished, painted, or suitably marked safety red.

2. Ceiling-mounted hangers, supports, cable trays, and raceways must be finished, painted, or suitably marked safety yellow where less than 7.7 feet above finished floor.

C. Signs, labels, and tags required for personnel safety must comply with the following standards:

1. Safety Colors: NEMA Z535.1.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 2
100% Design Submittal

2. Facility Safety Signs: NEMA Z535.2.

3. Safety Symbols: NEMA Z535.3.

4. Product Safety Signs and Labels: NEMA Z535.4.

5. Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes for Temporary Hazards: NEMA Z535.5.

D. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 260573 "Power System Studies" requirements for arcflash warning labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, must comply with UL 969.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 1000 V or Less:

1. Black letters on orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 1000 V or Less: Use colors listed for conductors.

1. Color must be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than 8 AWG.

2. Colors for 208Y/120 V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
d. Neutral: White.

3. Colors for 240/120 V Circuits (Single Phase):
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Neutral: White.

4. Colors for 240Δ/120 V Circuits (Three Phase, Four Wire, High Leg, Center Tap):
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Orange (high leg).
c. Phase C: Blue.
d. Neutral: White.

5. Colors for 480Y/277 V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 3
100% Design Submittal
c. Phase C: Yellow.
d. Neutral: Gray.

6. Colors for DC Circuits:
a. Positive: Red.
b. Negative: Black.

7. Color for Equipment Grounding Conductors: Green.

8. Color for Equipment Grounds: Bare copper or Green.

C. Warning Label Colors:

1. Identify system voltage with black letters on orange background.

D. Warning labels and nameplates/signs must include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 3 FEET MINIMUM."
E. Equipment Identification and Source Nameplate:

1. Color: White letters on a black field.

2. Material: See NAMEPLATES Article.

3. Equipment furnished under Divisions 26, 27, 28 and equipment control panels furnished under other Divisions must include equipment identification nameplates. Equipment includes, but is not limited to switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, separately mounted motor controllers, transfer switches, control panels, and named enclosures or cabinets. Nameplate to match designation indicated on Drawings.

4. Power source must be identified at all applicable equipment. Nameplate may be separate from identification nameplate or information may be contained on one nameplate. For example, a local disconnect switch for exhaust fan motor could have one nameplate reading “EF-3” for the identification nameplate and a second nameplate reading “FED FROM SWBD-OB”. Or a two-line nameplate combining the information for both identification and source.

F. Device Identification Labels:

1. Color: Black letters on a white field. In office areas only, black letters on a clear field.

2. Material: Self-adhesive type, machine generated, 1/4-inch-high letters.

3. Devices to be labeled with panel and branch circuit number include receptacles, wall switches, lighting fixtures, photocells, emergency lights, exit lights, instruments, etc. For example, a light switch powered from panelboard LP-2 and branch circuit 4 would have the label “LP-2/4” or “LP-2/CKT 4”.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 4
100% Design Submittal

2.3 NAMEPLATES
A. Material:

1. Engraved, engraved plastic (lamicoid).

2. Minimum size: Not less than 1/16 inch thick by 3/4 inch high by 2-1/2 inches wide.

3. Lettering: Upper case, 3/16 inches high minimum.

2.4 LABELS, BANDS, TUBES, AND SLEEVES
A. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Machine-printed, 3 mil thick, polyester or vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. Printed text is black, permanent, and waterproof.

1. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over legend. Labels sized such that clear shield overlaps entire printed legend.

B. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester or Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3 mil thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location.

C. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes (Sleeve Type): Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machineprinted identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at maximum of 200 degrees F. Comply with UL 224. Printed text is black, permanent, and waterproof.

2.5 TAPES
A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mil thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.

C. Underground-Line Warning Tape:

1. Tape:
a. Recommended by manufacturer for method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. b. Printing on tape must be permanent and may not be damaged by burial operations. c. Tape material and ink must be chemically inert and not be subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

2. Color and Printing:
a. Comply with APWA Uniform Color Code using NEMA Z535.1 safety colors. b. Inscriptions for Red Tapes: "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW". c. Inscriptions for Orange Tapes: "CAUTION BURIED COMMUNICATION LINE BELOW".
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 5
100% Design Submittal

3. Detectable Tape:
a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of printed pigmented polyolefin film, solid aluminum-foil core, and clear protective film that allows inspection of continuity of conductive core; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with inscription of utility, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 6 inches.
c. Overall Thickness: 5 mil.
d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.

2.6 TAGS
A. Metal Tags: Embossed, Type 316 stainless steel, 0.01 inch thick, punched for use with tie fastener. Secure with 0.048-inch diameter stainless steel band fastened with compression wire clamps
B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyester or Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory screened permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

2.7 CABLE TIES
A. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 degrees F in accordance with ASTM D638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 degrees F.

4. Color: Black.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Nameplates/Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 6
100% Design Submittal

3.2 SELECTION OF IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 1000 V or Less: For conductors at termination points and in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl tape if conductor is not factory colored to identify phase, neutral, and ground conductors. Use selfadhesive labels to identify circuit.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 1000 V: For conductors at termination points and in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl tape to identify phase conductors. Use nameplate or nonmetallic tag secured with cable ties to indicate phase and indicate circuit designation.

C. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

D. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes or self-adhesive labels with conductor designation.

E. Spare Conductors or Cables: Attach nonmetallic tags or self-adhesive labels to conductors and list source.

F. SCADA Systems, Communication Systems, Fire Alarm Systems or Other Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes or self-adhesive labels with conductor designation.

G. Conduit Identification: For designated identification as indicated on Drawings provide metal tags.

H. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes, 24 inches by 24 inches and Larger: For voltage identification provide nameplates using 1 inch high minimum letters, white letters on red background.

I. Equipment Identification: For identification and source information provide nameplate(s) per COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS Article.

J. Device Identification: For source and circuit information provide self-adhesive label per COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS Article.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install identification product in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

D. Verify identity of item before installing identification products. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 7
100% Design Submittal
E. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.

F. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

G. Apply wire markers so entire designation is clearly visible.

H. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 250573 “Power System Studies”.

I. Identify the system voltage (e.g. 208/120 VOLTS, 480 VOLTS) at the covers of large pull boxes or junction boxes.

J. Install field device (instruments, receptacles, switches, etc.) labels.

K. Install equipment nameplates. Nameplate fastening requirements:

1. NEMA 1 and 12 Enclosures: Screw mounted using stainless steel screws.

2. Other Enclosure Types: Bonded using epoxy or similar permanent waterproof adhesive.

Two sided foam adhesive tape is not acceptable.

L. Panelboard and Transformer Panel Assembly Identification:

1. Provide equipment identification nameplates as previously described.

2. Label branch circuit phase and neutral wires with associated pole number using selfadhesive labels or type written sleeve type labels.

3. Install typed as built circuit directory listing with unique load identification.

M. Underground Line Warning Tape:

1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 18 inch overall.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.

N. Install Tags. Fastening Requirements:

1. Secure metal tags using stainless steel ties.

2. Secure nonmetallic tags with UV-stabilized cable ties.

END OF SECTION 260553
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Identification for Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260553 - 8
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260573 - POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Requirements:

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a computer-based study for:

1. Short circuit report.

2. Protective device coordination report.

3. Arc flash report.

B. Study encompasses the power distribution system of the City of Redlands, Redlands Wastewater Treatment Plant. Facility is located at 1950 Nevada St, Redlands, CA 92373.

C. Provide power studies up to 480V SWBD M. Provide new arc flash labels for SWBD, Panelboards, VFDs and disconnect switches.

D. The facility power system study was conducted in 2016. This study can be requested from the owner before performing a new study.

E. Study includes distribution to new HVAC equipment, existing and new panelboards. All power distribution to that point whether existing or new is included. Existing and new equipment included, but not limited to:

1. Switchboards, and panelboards.

2. Disconnect switches.

F. The local electric utility is Electric – Southern California Edison.

G. Obtain all data necessary to perform the study. Data included, but not limited to:

1. Up to date one-line diagrams.

2. Equipment data.

3. Cable sizes and lengths.

4. Existing protective device settings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 2
100% Design Submittal

5. Electric utility information: available fault current, protective device equipment information and settings, X/R ratios, transformer impedances and ratings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boundary, Arc Flash: When an arc flash hazard exists, an approach limit from an arc source at which the incident energy equals 1.2 cal/cm² (5 J/cm²).

B. Boundary, Limited Approach: An approach limit at a distance from an exposed energized electrical conductor or circuit part within which a shock hazard exists.

C. Boundary, Restricted Approach: An approach limit at a distance from an exposed energized electrical conductor or circuit part within which there is an increased likelihood of electric shock, due to electrical arc-over combined with inadvertent movement.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. Existing items to remain functional throughout the construction period.

E. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA.

F. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

G. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies.

H. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.

I. Preliminary Short Circuit Report: Report that includes the maximum available utility fault current, proposed equipment, and existing equipment to determine if new equipment may be released for manufacturing and existing equipment is adequate for the calculated short circuit levels.

J. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal condition or current flow exists and then removes the affected portion of the circuit from the system.

K. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

L. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.

M. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."
N. Supplier: The person, firm or corporation identified as such to provide the power system study and means the Supplier or its authorized agent. See also Power Systems Analysis Specialist. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 3
100% Design Submittal

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Supplier qualifications per Quality Assurance paragraph. Submit prior to starting study.

Include the following:

1. Brief description of each qualifying study.

2. Name of owner of installation on which study was performed with address, telephone number, and contact person.

3. Date of study.

4. Any other information indicating the firm's experiences and ability to perform the work and business status.

B. Preliminary Power System Study Report. Report must be approved prior to release for manufacture of major electrical equipment including but not limited to existing switchgear, motor control centers, generator and all panelboards as well as new switchboard, and panelboard. Fault data from the utility must be included and not assumed or submittal will be rejected.

C. Final Power System Study Report. Report must be approved prior to energization of new major electrical equipment. Revise study as required for changes during construction.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:

1. For Power Systems Analysis Software Developer.

2. For Power System Analysis Specialist.

3. For Field Adjusting Agency.

B. If requested, Product Certificates: For power system study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399, IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Final power system study updated with any changes made after equipment start-up.

B. Digital computer files with full read-write access of the complete power system model and library.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Study using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis.

B. Software algorithms comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 4
100% Design Submittal
C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications:

1. Design computer program to perform short-circuit studies or have a function, component, or add-on module designed to perform short-circuit studies.

2. Develop computer program under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

3. Complies with IEEE 399, IEEE 141, IEEE 242, IEEE 519, IEEE 1015, and IEEE 1584 as applicable to the project scope.

E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state where Project is located and has regularly engaged in this electrical engineering study specialty for minimum of five years and has performed at least three projects of similar complexity to this project within the last three years. Perform all elements of the study under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer. Specialist is professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of the equipment under evaluation.

F. Power System Study Certification: Power Systems Analysis Specialist signs and seals the Report.

G. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications:

1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work.

2. A member company of NETA.

3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 POWER SYSTEM STUDY MEETINGS
A. Supplier's professional engineer responsible for the study to attend a meeting with the Engineer and Owner at the Owner's facility up to and including three times.

B. Purpose of the three meetings is:

1. Initial meeting discusses the study's scope and the Owner's operational and maintenance requirements prior to the preliminary study submittal.

2. Second meeting discusses the preliminary study and its recommendations. Based on this meeting, the Owner may request modifications to the studies' recommended protective settings to reduce the arc flash hazard or meet other operational objectives.

3. Third and final meeting presents the final study and its recommendations.

C. Provide a minimum of three-week notice to the Owner and Engineer in advance of all projected meeting dates.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 5
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Acceptable Software:

1. SKM System Analysis, Inc.: Power*Tools.

2. Operation Technology, Inc.: ETAP (Electrical Transient Analyzer Program).

3. EasyPower, Inc.: EasyPower.

2.2 POWER SYSTEM STUDY REPORT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Except for one-line diagrams, standard 8 1/2-inch by 11-inch pages, with total pages numbered.

B. Electronic PDF format copy with electronic bookmarks for each section.

C. Signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state in which the project is located.

D. Organized in the following order:

1. Executive Summary.

2. Short Circuit Analysis.

3. Short Circuit Computer Printout.

4. Protective Device Coordination.

5. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.

6. Utility Data.

7. Modeled One Line Diagrams.

E. Information on one-line diagrams, legible when printed on 11-inch by 17-inch pages. Show the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.

2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA), impedance, and voltage ratings.

4. Motor designations and kVA ratings.

5. Switchgear, switchboard, and panelboard designations and ratings.

6. Derating factors and environmental conditions.

7. Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study.

F. Identifiers between the one-line diagram, short circuit study, coordination study, and arc flash study to be the same.

G. Include copies of correspondence with electric utility under utility data section of report.

Correspondence to include names and contact information. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 6
100% Design Submittal

2.3 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
A. Include summary of distribution system, information received from electric utility, major assumptions, adequacy of equipment to safely clear or close on any fault, identify problem areas and recommendations for resolving problem areas.

2.4 SHORT CIRCUIT
A. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551 (new 3002 series).

B. Include normal utility powered configuration, on-site generation configuration, and alternate modes of operation (i.e. alternate utility configuration, bus ties closed).

C. Include minimum and maximum possible fault conditions. Address three-phase bolted as well as ground fault conditions.

D. Consider the fault contribution of all motors operating during the maximum demand condition of the motors.

E. Calculate short-circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties based on an assumed bolted three-phase short circuit at switchboard, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelboard and other significant locations throughout the new distribution systems. Include the X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, KVA and symmetrical fault-current in the short circuit tabulations. Provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas. Include in tabulations fault impedance, X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor contribution, short circuit KVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault-currents.

F. Include representation of the site power system, the base quantities selected, impedance source data, calculation methods and tabulations, one-line diagrams, conclusions and recommendations.

G. Identify available fault current at each bus and evaluate system elements including but not limited to equipment, protective devices, and cables.

H. Base current transformers’ ratio and burden calculations on a 10 percent maximum ratio error per IEEE C57.13. Identify current transformers that will not allow the protective devices to operate within acceptable IEEE error margins and recommend corrective action.

I. List momentary, interrupting, and/or withstand rating of all key elements of the distribution system along with the maximum available fault current in tabular form and clearly indicate the adequacy of the element with PASS / FAIL designation.

J. Short Circuit Computer Printout:

1. Show calculations in sufficient detail for easy review.

2. Back up calculations become part of the final report.

2.5 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
A. Comply with IEEE 242 (new 3004 series).
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 7
100% Design Submittal
B. Utilize results from the short circuit study and balance the competing objectives of protection and continuity of service for the system specified, considering the basic factors of sensitivity, selectivity and speed. Include all system protective devices in the coordination analysis, not just overcurrent protective devices. This includes, but is not limited to, under and over voltage protective relays, frequency relays, differential relays and reverse power relays.

C. Show graphic indication of coordination between protective devices in the form of full color time-current coordination (TCC) plots with each protective device curve in a unique color for easy review.

D. Provide separate TCC plots for each mode of operation. Provide separate TCC plots for “normal” and “stand by” operation. Show maximum fault values in each case. Both power sources shown on one plot is unacceptable.

E. Provide separate TCC for phase over-current and ground fault.

F. Show no more than six devices on one TCC. Of these six curves, two (the largest upstream device and the smallest downstream device) repeat curves shown on other coordination plots to provide cross-reference. Designate each TCC with a unique identifier and include each TCC identifier and descriptive title in the study’s table of contents.

G. Include in each TCC the following as applicable:

1. TCC name and description.

2. One-line diagram.

3. Identifiers on one-line diagram and curves.

4. Significant motor starting characteristics.

5. Appropriate NEC protection points.

6. Appropriate ANSI/IEEE protection points.

7. Magnetizing inrush points of transformers.

8. Transformer damage curves.

9. Complete operating bands for low voltage circuit breaker trip devices and fuses.

10. Relay coil taps, time-dial settings and pickup settings.

11. Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

12. Power cable withstand curves.

13. Generator short circuit decrement and thermal limit curves.

H. Terminate device characteristic curve on TCC at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which that device is exposed, based on the short circuit study.

I. Select each primary protective device for a delta-to-wye-connected transformer so the characteristic or operating band is within the transformer parameters; where feasible, include a parameter equivalent to 58 percent of the ANSI C37.91 withstand curve to afford protection for secondary line-to-ground faults.

J. Separate low voltage power circuit breakers from each other and the associated primary protective device, by a 16 percent current margin for coordination and protection in the event of line-to-line faults.

K. Separate protective relays by a 0.3 second time margin for the maximum 3 phase fault conditions to assure proper selectivity.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 8
100% Design Submittal
L. Optimize settings for breakers and relays to provide the most effective protection practicable for all modes and power sources.

M. Include at least all devices down to largest branch circuit and largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center and/or power distribution panelboard. Include all adjustable setting ground fault protective devices.

N. Provide tabulations of recommended settings for all protective devices. Where devices are existing, highlight any changes from the existing setting to the proposed recommended setting.

O. Provide all information required to program/set multifunction solid state relays.

2.6 ARC FLASH HAZARD
A. Comply with IEEE 1584, NFPA 70, and NFPA 70E as applicable.

B. Utilize short circuit and protective device coordination results to provide arc flash hazard analysis. Perform calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584 or NFPA 70E with the method identified within the report.

C. Calculate the incident energy levels at each faulted bus for each mode of operation and for both maximum and minimum fault currents.

D. Include calculations at line side and load side of main breakers, where applicable.

E. Provide tabular report for all modes and conditions and include “worst case” summary. Use the “worst case” to generate the arc flash labels. Include:

1. Fault location.

2. Arcing fault magnitude.

3. Protective device clearing time.

4. Duration of the arc.

5. Arc flash boundary.

6. Working distance.

7. Incident energy.

8. Electrode configuration.

F. Highlight any available incident energy over 40 cal/cm² and provide recommendations to mitigate the hazard.

G. Arc Flash Labels:

1. Machine printed, 4-inches by 4-inches (nominal), thermal transfer, high adhesion polyester.

2. Provide UV resistant laminate for outdoor labels.

H. Arc Flash Label Information:

1. Equipment name.

2. Identifier LINE or LOAD where equipment has potential different energy levels. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 9
100% Design Submittal

3. Arc flash hazard information: arc flash boundary and incident energy in cal/cm².

4. Shock hazard information: limited approach and restricted approach boundaries.

5. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) requirements.

6. Study Supplier, project number, and date.

I. Provide arc flash label sample with preliminary report.

J. Do not pre-print the labels until equipment is energized and protective devices set according to the approved final protective device coordination study.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to Engineer's attention.

2. For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For relocated equipment and that which is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. Ensure qualifications of technicians and engineers as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the required input data to support the power system study.

C. Field data gathering for existing systems is under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study and by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

D. Data included, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Product data for overcurrent protective devices and existing settings.

2. Electrical power utility information. Information required may include:
a. Available minimum and maximum three-phase fault current and X/R ratio. b. Available minimum and maximum single-line-to-ground fault current and X/R ratio.
c. Service transformer voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings, winding configuration, and grounding method.
d. Upstream protective device data.

3. Power sources and ties.

4. For switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers, ampacity and SCCR in amperes RMS symmetrical.

5. For transformers, kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 10
100% Design Submittal

6. For reactors, manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and impedance.

7. For circuit breakers, trip units, and fuses, manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

8. For generators, short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

9. For busways, manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material.

10. For motors, horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

11. Conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, shield parameters for medium voltage cable, and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).

12. For relays, manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

13. Derating factors.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Do all testing and adjustment prior to the energization of new equipment.

B. Test existing adjustable protective devices in accordance with NETA MTS.

C. Test new adjustable protective devices in accordance with NETA ATS.

D. Adjust existing and new protective devices according to approved coordination study.

E. Ensure testing and adjusting by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

F. After successful testing and adjustment, install calibration sticker with Field Adjusting Agency name, employee initials, and date of calibration at each relay or protective device.

G. After energization, minor adjustments to settings may be required to commission the equipment.

H. Submit field report and list any changes made during field adjustment or commissioning for update for record submittal of study.

I. For adjustable breakers, install sticker listing final adjusted settings, i.e. LTPU, LTD, STPU, STD, INST, GFPU, and GFD.

3.3 ARC FLASH LABELING
A. After the field adjustment of relays and protective devices, apply arc flash study labels.

B. Apply arc flash labels on the front covers of the following new equipment:

1. Switchboards, and panelboards.

2. Variable frequency controllers.

3. Disconnect switches.

4. 480V control panels.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 11
100% Design Submittal

5. Circuit breakers.

6. HVAC Equipment.

7. All loads in 120/208V and 120/240V panelboards.

C. Apply arc-flash labels at each section for large equipment such as Switchboard.

D. Install LINE and LOAD arc-flash labels as applicable.

E. Remove any previous arc flash study labels as applicable and install new labels under the direction of the Power System Analysis Specialist.

END OF SECTION 260573
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Power System Studies Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260573 - 12
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commissioning of Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260800 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260800 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes procurement of the services of an Electrical Testing Firm Supplier (ETFS) to provide all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully commissioned electrical system.

B. The intent of the Section is to:

1. Provide electrical system construction planning.

2. Provide summary qualifications of the testing firm.

3. Summarize division of responsibility for electrical commissioning.

4. Define additional testing, inspections, and adjustments.

C. The following Division 26 Sections include testing and/or settings requirements:

1. Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

2. Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

3. Section 260573 "Power System Studies.”
D. Other Divisions include electrical testing requirements for equipment with electrical components. These include:

1. Automation Equipment – Division 40.

2. Fire Alarm, Security and CCTV Equipment – Division 28 E. Related Requirements:

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Electrical Testing Firm Supplier (ETFS): The firm responsible for providing specialty and independent testing and adjustments of electrical systems on the project..

B. Low Voltage: 600 V and below.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commissioning of Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260800 - 2
100% Design Submittal
C. Maintenance of Plant Operations (MOPO): A construction plan which prevents or limits process disruptions during construction.

D. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Table of contents / Executive summary.

2. Test procedures and equipment used, include calibration dates.

3. Test results that comply with requirements.

4. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

5. Typed test forms, no handwritten entries.

B. Certification that all adjustable circuit breakers have been adjusted to the power system study final approved setting.

C. Certification that arc flash labels that correspond to the final approved power system study have been applied.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. LV Master Project Plan.

1. Submit, within 60 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, the LV Master Project Plan.

Plan to include the following:
a. Informational submittal qualification data.
b. Detailed construction phasing for the LV system.
c. Required shutdowns and estimated durations.
d. Temporary power plans for MOPO.

B. Additional LV Project Plans.

1. Submit, no later than 30 calendar days prior to a requested LV system shutdown, a LV Project Plan for upcoming shutdown activities. Plan to include the following:
a. Shutdown and Re-Energization Switching Procedures. Shutdown Procedures will include areas intended to be shutdown, expected duration of shutdown, staffing, safety plans, one-line diagrams showing associated breakers or switches with their status (opened, closed, racked out, temporary grounds) and lockout-tagout locations. Re-Energization Procedures will include same information as Shutdown Procedures, but also phasing and rotation check locations upon re-energization. b. Failure to submit plan in a timely manner will cause the shutdown to be rescheduled.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commissioning of Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260800 - 3
100% Design Submittal
C. Switchboard

1. Submit, no later than 30 calendar days prior to first equipment start-up, a plan for operational checks.

D. Power Monitoring / SCADA Verification Plan.

1. Submit, no later than 30 calendar days prior to substantial completion, the list of SCADA points to confirm. Confirmation of actual data (i.e. the breaker is open/closed; amps / volts / kVA readings are correct) is to be done when load is running.

1.6 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
A. Electrical Contractor Responsibilities Include:

1. Routine insulation-resistance, continuity, and rotation checks prior to and in addition to manufacturer or EFTS testing.

2. Transformer voltage checks and adjustment of taps.

3. Motor rotation and ampacity checks, overload settings, field test reports.

4. Provide suitable and stable source of electrical power required for testing.

5. Coordination and scheduling with Owner, Engineer, Equipment Manufacturers/Suppliers, and ETFS.

6. Obtain the power system study. Engineer must review and approve study prior to placing any new equipment in service.

B. Equipment Manufacturer Responsibilities:

1. Installation checks and testing as listed per individual Section.

C. Additional Testing, Inspections, and Adjustments:

1. Infrared testing of non-modified equipment is not included / required.

D. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment connected to Normal electrical systems, including the following:
a. Switchboard transformers.
b. Branch-circuit panelboards.
c. Grounding systems.

2. Controls and instrumentation, including the following:
a. Equipment monitoring systems.
b. Energy monitoring and control systems.
c. Electrical metering and metering system.
d. Demand response systems.
e. Lighting control systems.
f. Security systems.
g. Fire-alarm systems.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Commissioning of Electrical Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260800 - 4
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Field testing and commissioning is intended to follow the latest revisions of NETA Standard ATS, ECS, and MTS as applicable unless otherwise modified in these Sections.

B. Site standard phase rotation is clockwise. That is when phases A, B, C are connected to terminals 1, 2, 3 the phase rotation will be clockwise. If phase rotation must be corrected, it should be done at the end device, i.e. the motor.

C. Where two in-house potential sources are present and may be connected, regardless of the safety interlocks provided, testing to verify correct phasing is required. Without checking this, one source may have clockwise rotation with a 123-ABC and the second source may have a clockwise rotation with a 123-BCA installation. A three-phase short would result if safety interlocks fail and these two sources are connected inadvertently. Hot phase testing is required at all two source locations. This includes the following equipment on this project:

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify electrical equipment and systems have been tested in compliance with Contract Documents.

B. Provide reports.

END OF SECTION 260800
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting Control Devices Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260923 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Automatic lighting control devices including time control switches, photoelectric switches, lighting contactors, and daylight-harvesting, occupancy and vacancy sensors.

B. Related Requirements:

2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on the project. Note that not all products listed may be utilized on this project.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranties.

B. Field quality-control reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting Control Devices Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260923 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 INDOOR LIGHTING SENSORS
A. Description: Occupancy, vacancy, or daylight sensor used for indoor lighting control. Refer to Drawings for detailed requirements. Catalog numbers listed are provided as a design basis for performance and quality desired. Equivalent design and quality from other manufacturers will be acceptable upon Engineer’s approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” and Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems” for wiring connections and wiring methods.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems” to identify equipment, power sources, wires and cables, and terminals.

D. Adjust timing and aiming of devices to suit Owner operations.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After installing luminaires and lighting control devices, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm correct control operation in all modes.

B. Prepare field quality report certifying verification of correct installation. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting Control Devices Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260923 - 3
100% Design Submittal
END OF SECTION 260923
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting Control Devices Renovation & Expansion Final Design 260923 - 4
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Transformers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262200 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of low voltage dry-type transformers:

1. Distribution type.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260010 “Supplemental Requirements for Electrical” for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. Note this Section may include products not required for the project.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of field connections.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field-quality-control reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Transformers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262200 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note shipping damage to packaging and transformer.

1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will be stored after inspection, re-package transformer using original or new packaging materials that provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's packaging.

B. Storage: Store in warm, dry, and temperature-stable location in original shipping packaging.

C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions within enclosure of ventilated-type units, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting transformers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to equipment manufacturer restrictions listed in Section 260010 “Supplemental Requirements for Electrical, transformers from the following manufacturers are approved:

1. Eaton.

2. GE by ABB.

3. Siemens.

4. Square D by Schneider Electric.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of transformer from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with the following standards:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Transformers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262200 - 3
100% Design Submittal

1. NEMA ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.

2. UL 1561, Standard for Safety Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers.

3. US Department of Energy Efficiency Standards for Low Voltage Distribution Transformers.

B. General Description:

1. Dry type, two winding. Configuration, kVA, and voltage shown on Drawings.

2. Windings: Copper, unless noted otherwise herein.

3. Temperature Rise: 150 degrees C, unless noted otherwise herein.

C. Taps for transformers 15 kVA and larger: Full capacity, two 2.5 percent above and four 2.5 percent below.

D. Grounding: Provide ground-bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer enclosure.

E. Enclosures:

1. Indoor: NEMA 250, Type 1 gasketed or 2, ventilated. Standard enclosure type.

F. Special Options: Electrostatic shielding, K-13 Rated, harmonic-mitigating, or low sound level rating, where noted on Drawings.

G. Accessories:

1. Wall or ceiling brackets for wall or ceiling mount, where noted on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for transformers.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's published instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify the grounding electrode system is present and complies with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems". Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 “Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction” and NECA 409 “Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers.” ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Transformers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262200 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. Comply with manufacturer’s published instructions.

C. Install mounting brackets, concrete pads, hangers, and other supports prior to setting transformers in place.

D. Install transformers level and plumb. Install vibration isolators between transformer enclosure and supports in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Anchor floor mounted transformer to concrete base. Remove shipping braces and adjust internal mounting bolts and hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Install flexible conduits to minimize vibration transmission.

G. Ground this separately derived system in accordance with Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.” Terminate all grounding and bonding conductors on a common equipment grounding terminal mounted inside the transformer enclosure. Do not allow grounding terminal bar to block ventilation openings.

H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

I. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

1. Identify equipment by name designation and fed from source with nameplates.

2. Color code wiring.

3. Identify branch circuit phase and neutral wires by circuit number at TPA.

4. Provide as built type panel directory at TPA.

J. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 260573 “Power System Studies”.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform checkout and testing activities recommended by and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, NETA ATS, and as specified herein. Correct deficiencies, make adjustments, and retest until requirements are met.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

4. Verify resilient mounts are free and shipping brackets are removed.

5. Verify unit is clean.

6. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following:
a. A low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Calibrated torque wrench.
c. Thermographic survey.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Transformers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262200 - 5
100% Design Submittal

7. Verify as-left tap connections are as specified.

C. Electrical Tests:

1. Perform insulation-resistance tests for winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground.

2. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after energization and prior to loading.

D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform follow-up infrared scan of transformers, at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

E. Voltage Recording: Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit under loaded conditions for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy.

1. Submit summary written report.

2. Include the following for each transformer:
a. Designation.
b. Nominal secondary voltage.
c. Existing tap setting.
d. Available tap settings.
e. Steady state maximum secondary voltage recorded.
f. Steady state minimum secondary voltage recorded.
g. Time period duration.
h. Graphical representation of voltage over time period.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tap settings when directed by Engineer.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish and debris from inside and around equipment. Vacuum clean interior.

END OF SECTION 262213
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Low-Voltage Transformers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262200 - 6
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Low voltage, dead front switchboards, components, and accessories.

2. Spares and spaces in equipment as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Related Requirements:

2. Section 260573 “Power System Studies” for short circuit, coordination, and arc flash.

The preliminary short circuit study submittal must be approved by the Engineer prior to review of the switchboard submittal.

3. Section 260800 “Commissioning of Electrical Systems” for startup and commissioning of switchboards.

4. Section 264313 “Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits” for features and performance requirements of switchboard manufacturer provided SPDs.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include descriptive bill of materials, literature, and catalog cut sheets of components and accessories.

2. Include time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices. Include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard.

1. Include drawing index.

2. Include dimensioned plans and elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

3. Indicate shipping sections, and weights of each assembled section. Show major components and features on elevations. Show locations for conduit entrances, anchor bolts, and leveling channels on plans.

4. Include assembly ratings including enclosure type, short circuit, voltage, current, and bus material.

5. Include tabulation of rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

6. Include cable terminal lug sizes.

7. Include wiring and schematic diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

8. Include nameplate information.

9. Where applicable, include busway connection details, key interlock schemes, sequence of operations, composite floor plans of close-coupled assemblies, and utility metering compartment details.

C. Installation Instructions: For switchboard and major component assembly.

D. Specification Compliance:

1. Include a copy of this specification confirming compliance with each paragraph. For deviations, provide detailed commentary to explain the deviation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for switchboards, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Certificate of compliance.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 3
100% Design Submittal

1. Include the following:
a. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and installed components. b. Manufacturer’s instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker trip settings. c. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
d. “As-Built” shop drawings incorporated during construction by manufacturer or Contractor.
e. “As-Left” settings for adjustable devices such as timers and overcurrent protective devices.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type but no fewer than two of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Rating Plug and Trip Units: Of each size and type.

4. Indicating Lights (lamp and lens cap): Two of each type and color installed.

5. One dozen each of cover bolts, spring nuts and door fasteners.

B. Touchup paint: half-pint container of paint matching the enclosure exterior finish.

C. One single hand-held portable test kit capable of testing each of the circuit breaker microprocessor trip unit functions.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the following for delivery, storage, and handling:

1. Manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Section 260010 “Supplementary Requirements for Electrical.”

3. NECA 400-2007 “Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards.”

4. ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1-2011 “General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 1000 Volts or Less.”
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 4
100% Design Submittal

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboards and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to equipment manufacturer restrictions listed in Section 260010 “Supplemental Requirements for Electrical,” switchboards from the following manufacturers are approved:

1. ABB.

2. Eaton.

3. Schneider Electric / Square D.

4. Siemens.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Modifications or Additions to Existing Switchboards: Use original manufacturer for model series still in production; otherwise use original manufacturer or approved manufacturer with documented prior experience providing similar types of modifications.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Low voltage switchboard assembly, free-standing, dead-front type, ANSI / NEMA rated, and UL 891 labeled for installation on low voltage electrical distribution system indicated on Drawings. General arrangement, alignment, ratings, and major components of switchboards are shown on the Drawings.

B. Fully rate main and feeder circuit breakers for the specified short circuit duty. Systems employing series ratings are unacceptable.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. NEMA PB 2-2011, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.

2. UL 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.

3. UL 891, Switchboards, CCN WEVZ.

4. UL 1066, Power Circuit Breakers up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC Used in Enclosures.

5. UL 1449, Surge Protective Devices.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 5
100% Design Submittal
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

F. Temperature: Design switchboards and devices for continuous operation at rated current with a 40 degrees Celsius (104 degrees Fahrenheit) ambient temperature.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. SWBD OB:

1. Front access only, front and rear aligned, with individual sections for main breaker.

Group mounted feeder sections. Eaton Pow-R-Line Xpert or equivalent.

2.4 CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct switchboard with required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. Cover sides and rear with removable bolt-on covers. Form edges of front covers or hinged front panels. Provide adequate ventilation.

B. Align sections of switchboard as indicated on Drawings.

C. Provide switchboard assembly with adequate lifting means.

D. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

E. Maximum Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. Comply with NEC height limit of operating handles when switchboard is installed on 4-inch-high housekeeping pad.

F. Exterior Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color over a rustinhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

G. Interior Enclosure Finishes:

1. Control and power cell compartment: high gloss white for easier visibility.

2. Unpainted steel parts, plated for corrosion resistance.

H. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

I. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments. Use captive quarter turn fasteners.

J. When wires or buswork passes through holes or sections, add suitable guarding or grommets for close fit and to prevent cutting or chafing of insulation.

K. Where Drawings indicate space for future overcurrent protective devices, equip space with so only the overcurrent protective device is needed to be added. Include buswork, barriers, connections, protective device mounting hardware, doors/covers, etc. required. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 6
100% Design Submittal
L. Bus Systems:

1. Phase Bus Arrangement: A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, and left to right when viewed from front of switchboard.

2. Phase and Neutral Bus: Tin plated copper, bolted joints, fully rated throughout the lineup.

Tapered bus is not allowed. Braced for 65,000 A rms unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Full size neutral bus for four wire systems if indicated on Drawings.

3. Ground Bus: Minimum 1/4-inch by 2-inch, tin plated copper uninsulated ground bus, extended through each section.

4. Disconnect Links: Isolate neutral bus from incoming neutral conductors. Bond neutral bus to equipment ground bus for switchboards utilized as service equipment or separately derived systems.

M. Wiring/Terminations:

1. Instrument and Control Wire: Stranded copper, type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Minimum size No. 14 AWG.

2. Control Wire Terminations: Insulated locking spade terminals, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to device. Current transformer secondary leads must connect to shorting type terminal blocks before connecting to another device.

3. Provide numbered terminal blocks for landing control wiring that leaves the switchboard.

4. Power Terminations: Mechanical type, suitable for 75 or 90 degrees Celcius depending on ampacity rating for conductor, copper cable of the size indicated on Drawings.

2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit breakers 800 A frame and larger: 600 V, insulated-case type, listed and labeled to UL 489, 100 percent continuous ampacity, fixed mount, electrically operated. Temperature insensitive, true RMS, integral, fully adjustable solid state electronic trip unit with the following features:

1. Independently adjustable long-time pick-up and delay.

2. Independently adjustable short-time pick-up, delay, and I²t settings.

3. Adjustable instantaneous pick-up.

4. Independently adjustable ground fault pick-up, delay and I²t settings.

5. Trip mode targets for overload, short circuit and ground fault.

6. Long-time pick-up light.

7. Ammeter readout for each phase.

B. Circuit breakers 225 A frame and less: 600 V, molded-case type, listed and labeled to UL 489, 80 percent continuous ampacity rated. Thermal magnetic trip.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Signs and Nameplates: Engraved, laminated plastic, stainless steel screw attachment, background color and letters as noted herein.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 7
100% Design Submittal
B. Master Nameplate: Switchboard designation, service ratings, factory order number, and date (month/year) of manufacture. Lettering not less than 3/8-inch high, black background, white letters. Locate at top of switchboard section containing incoming feed.

C. Unit Compartment or Breaker Nameplates: Designation as indicated on drawings. Lettering not less than 3/8-inch high, black background, white letters.

D. Identify pilot devices and operators using legend plates or nameplates.

E. Identify internal components, corresponding to wiring diagrams.

F. Include warning labels on terminals that are energized with the power disconnect OFF.

G. Control Wire Identification: Typed sleeve type labels at each end, corresponding to wiring diagrams. Wiring less than six inches may be numbered at only one end. Identify foreign voltage control wiring with yellow wires.

2.7 SURGE PROTECTION
A. Integral Surge Protective Device: To protect input AC line from transients.

1. By switchboard manufacturer, factory installed, with integral disconnect.

2. Type 2.

3. SCCR: Equal to SCCR of switchboard.

4. Performance and Features: Comply with Section 264313 “Surge Protection for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits.”

2.8 INSTRUMENTATION AND METERING
A. Current Transformers: 600 V, 5 A secondary, bar type, single secondary winding and secondary shorting device and in compliance with IEEE C57.13-2016. Ensure burden and accuracy is consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

B. Digital Metering (Power Monitors): By switchboard manufacturer, factory installed and integrated. Schneider Electric PowerLogic PM8000 Series or equal for immediate level of metering and power quality analysis including waveform capture. Locate top of power quality meter cubicle at 60-inches from bottom of switchboard, plus or minus 6-inches.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect equipment according to UL, NEMA, and manufacturer.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 8
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Upon delivery of switchboard and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for damage.

B. Examine areas and surfaces to receive switchboard, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

C. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems” have been met.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturer’s published instructions, comply with the following:

1. NECA NEIS 400-2007 – Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards.

2. NEMA PB 2.1-2011 – General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 1000 Volts or Less.

C. Provide equipment housekeeping pads as detailed on the Drawings.

D. Bolt switchboard floor sills directly to finished floor or equipment pad. Make structure level, plumb, and secure. Use 1/2-inch (minimum) anchor bolts. Provide necessary hardware and shims.

E. Remove temporary lifting angles, lugs, and shipping braces. Touch up damaged paint finishes.

F. When conduits enter the top of the switchboard, enter the corresponding section. Do not enter the switchboard from the side unless approved in writing by the Engineer.

G. Grounding and Bonding:

1. Bond equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system as shown on Drawings.

2. Bond all conduits including stub-ups to the equipment ground bus.

H. Install conduits to prevent water from entering enclosure. Seal voids around conduit stub-ups.

I. Neatly group field installed interior wiring by circuit using plastic tie wraps. Support circuit groups to avoid stress at terminations.

J. Make wiring interconnections between shipping splits. Install bus splice plates. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 9
100% Design Submittal
K. Tighten bolted connections and wiring connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer’s written instructions.

L. Obtain the manufacturer’s services for the commissioning and startup work.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify equipment by name designation and fed from source nameplates.

2. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components.

B. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 260573 “Power System Studies.”

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Division of Responsibilities:

1. Provide installation and assist with all testing and startup activities.

2. Engage factory authorized service representative to assist in installation, inspection, testing, startup, and commissioning activities specified herein to active manufacturer’s warranty.

3. Engage a qualified testing agency as defined in this Section to perform activities defined in Section 260800 “Commissioning of Electrical Systems”.

B. General Requirements:

1. Perform inspection, testing, and startup activities recommended by and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, NETA ATS, and as specified herein.

2. Perform testing and test methods in compliance with NFPA 70B.

3. Optional NETA ATS tests are not required unless specifically called for in this specification or the manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Provide materials and labor as necessary.

5. Correct deficiencies, adjust, and retest until requirements are met.

6. Provide written report for each field testing or service visit.

C. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Confirm equipment and devices conform to approved shop drawings.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. Adjust compartment doors as required.

4. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections. Use calibrated torque wrench.

5. Verify unit is clean.

6. Verify smooth and correct operation of mechanical devices: circuit breakers, interlocks, etc.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Switchboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262413 - 10
100% Design Submittal
D. Electrical Tests:

1. Insulation resistance test of bus, phase to phase and phase to ground after disconnecting devices sensitive to test voltage.

2. Check polarity and continuity of metering and relaying circuits.

3. Test ground connections for continuity and resistance.

4. Test protective devices and equipment as recommended by manufacturer.

5. Verify correct input and output voltages, currents, and phase rotations.

E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

F. Switchboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.5 STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING SERVICE
A. Adjust protective devices in accordance with the final approved submittal of Section 260573 “Power System Studies.”

3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate correct operation, adjust settings, and maintain switchboards to Owner.

B. Provide 8-hour man day for instruction. Time instruction to cover all working shifts.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air.

END OF SECTION 262413
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.

2. Circuit breakers.

3. Accessories and special construction.

B. Related Requirements:

2. Section 264313 “Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits” for performance requirements of factory installed SPDs.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. Note this Section may include products not required for the project.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

6. Include evidence of listing, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, for SPD as installed in panelboard. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 2
100% Design Submittal

7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

9. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

10. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Include Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of coordination curves.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

B. Warranty documentation.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboards and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to equipment manufacturer restrictions listed in Section 260010 “Supplemental Requirements for Electrical.” panelboards from the following manufacturers are approved:

1. Eaton.

2. ABB.

3. Siemens.

4. Schneider Electric / Square D.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain new panelboards from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain retrofit disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices from existing panelboard manufacturer or subsequent responsible manufacturer, to maintain overall UL listing of panelboard.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing agency recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. NEMA PB 1-2011, Panelboards.

2. UL 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations.

3. UL 50E, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations.

4. UL 67, Standard for Panelboards, CCN QEUY.

5. UL 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.

6. UL 1449, Surge Protective Devices.

C. Ratings:

1. Ratings are indicated on the Drawings.

2. Series rated panelboards are prohibited. Circuit breakers must be fully rated for the short circuit rating listed for the panelboard.

D. Construction:

1. NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Equipment grounding bars are ordered as an accessory as they are not required by NEC. NEC allows metal conduits to act as equipment grounding conductors. CDM Smith designs always require green wire grounds for equipment grounding conductors. Green wire grounds should never be landed on the same terminal bar as neutrals.

2. Copper equipment grounding bar, separate and distinct from neutral bar.

3. Conductor Lugs:
a. Mechanical type.
b. Size suitable for indicated conductor sizes.
c. Neutral (when present) and ground lug quantity equal to each pole in panelboard.

4. Where Drawings indicate space for future circuit breaker, equip panelboard with bus bars, blank covers, and mounting hardware so only the future breaker need be provided.

E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearance between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 4
100% Design Submittal

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturer’s lighting and appliance panelboard using molded-case bolt-on circuit breakers.

B. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with flush keyed lock and catch, except doors over 48 inches in height to use a vault-type latch with tumbler lock and 3- point catch. All locks keyed alike.

C. Bus: Tin-plated copper.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded case, manufactured by panelboard manufacturer.

B. Plug-in or bolt-on as listed in associated panelboard Article.

C. Configuration, frame size, trip, and special features such as GFCI (Class A trip, 4-6 mA) or GFI (Class B trip, 30 mA) as shown on Drawings.

D. Provide breaker lugs to accommodate wire sizes shown on Drawings.

E. Multi-pole breakers to have common trip. Do not convert single pole breakers to multi-pole using handle ties, use multi-pole breaker.

F. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

1. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

2. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

3. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2.5 ACCESSORIES AND SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Accessories such as breaker lockout devices or key interlocks are indicated on the Drawings.

B. Electronic Grade:

1. Neutrals: 200 percent rated.

C. NEMA 3R or 12 Enclosure:

1. Material: galvanized steel.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 5
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s published instructions.

B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturer’s published instructions, comply with the following:

1. ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1-2023 – General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

2. NECA NEIS 407-2015 – Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards.

C. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind panelboard.

2. Mount back box plumb and level, and surface or flush mount as indicated on Drawings.

3. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to supports to allow a minimum of 1/2 inch air space between the box and the mounting surface.

4. Mount flush-mounted panelboards with front cover uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

5. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install circuit breakers not already factory installed. Rearrange circuit breakers to correspond to panel schedules shown on Drawings.

F. Tighten bolted connections and wiring connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 6
100% Design Submittal
H. Plug abandoned or unused entry holes.

I. Do not leave cut off wires at breakers, neutral bar terminal, or ground bar terminal.

J. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

1. Identify equipment by name designation and fed from source nameplates.

2. Identify pole numbers.

3. Color code wiring.

4. Identify branch circuit phase and neutral wires by circuit number.

5. Provide as built typed panelboard directory.

K. Adjust circuit breakers with adjustable trips in accordance with the final approved submittal of Section 260573 “Power System Studies.”
L. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 260573 “Power System Studies.”

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform checkout and testing activities recommended by and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, NECA 407, and as specified herein. Correct deficiencies, make adjustments, and retest until requirements are met.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

4. Verify unit is clean.

5. Verify breakers operate smoothly.

C. Electrical Tests:

1. Perform insulation resistance test on buswork in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Verify correct voltage and phasing at each panelboard.

3. Verify load currents are balanced across the three phases.

D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of panelboard connections for new or modified panelboards.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Prepare a certified report identifying panelboard checked and describing results of scanning. Include a notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish and debris from inside and around equipment. Vacuum clean interior.

END OF SECTION 262416
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Panelboards
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262416 - 8
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262716 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 262716 - ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electrical cabinets, enclosures, and accessories for low voltage electrical systems not specified elsewhere.

B. Related Requirements:

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cabinet or enclosure. Include accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 TERMINATION BOXES (TERMINAL CABINETS)
A. Description: Factory assembled, wall-mount industrial enclosure with hinged cover. Internal back plate with mounted terminal blocks. Size and additional detail per the Drawings.

B. NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 Termination Boxes:

1. Material: Sheet steel, minimum 14 gauge, without knockouts.

2. Construction: Flanged box, galvanized with continuous weld seams that are ground smooth.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262716 - 2
100% Design Submittal

3. Cover: Gasketed, hinged, vault type handle, three-point latch and keyed lock.

C. NEMA 4X Termination Boxes:

1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 14 gauge, without knockouts.

2. Construction: Flanged box, galvanized with continuous weld seams that are ground smooth.

3. Cover: Gasketed, hinged, vault type handle, three-point latch and keyed lock.

D. Provide individual terminals for shield/drain wire of instrumentation cable, i.e. each twisted shielded pair cable will have three terminals.

E. Provide a minimum of 50 spare terminals.

F. Identification:

1. Identify cabinet with nameplate, 3/8-inch-high letters, black letters on white background.

2. Identify each termination point on terminal blocks using type written labels.

3. Provide type written terminal block schedule for each cabinet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit the following:

1. Shop Drawings for Custom Enclosures and Cabinets: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Shop Drawings for Racks or Frames:
a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. b. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
c. Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. d. Grounding: Indicate location of RBB and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall-mounting brackets.

3.2 SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' written instructions, comply with NFPA 70 for selection of electrical cabinets and enclosures.

Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements.

B. Degree of Protection:

1. Outdoors:
a. Type 4X unless otherwise indicated.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262716 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2. Indoors:
a. Type 1 gasketed unless otherwise indicated.
b. Damp or Dusty Locations: Type 12.
c. Surface Mounted in Kitchens and Other Locations Exposed to Oil or Coolants:

Type 12.
d. Flush Mounted in Kitchens and Other Locations Exposed to Oil or Coolants:

Type 12.
e. Locations Exposed to Corrosive Agents: Type 4X.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.

1. Cabinets and Cutout Boxes: Article 312 of NFPA 70.

B. Special Installation Techniques:

1. Mount cabinets and enclosures at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements.

2. Do not install cabinets, enclosures, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

3. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to ensure a continuous ground path.

4. Identification: Install labels and nameplates in accordance with Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
a. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. b. Identify cabinets and enclosures with nameplates as indicated on Drawings. c. Provide as built typed terminal cabinet schedules.
d. Label each cabinet, enclosure, and rack with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

C. Interfaces with Other Work:

1. Coordinate installation of new products with existing conditions.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove construction dust and debris from cabinets and enclosures.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. After installation, protect cabinets and enclosures from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use protect to acceptance by Owner.

B. Protect coatings and finishes of cabinets and enclosures from damage and deterioration. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262716 - 4
100% Design Submittal

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 262716
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wiring Devices
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262726 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes receptacles, toggle switches, cover plates, and cord and plug sets.

B. Related Requirements:

2. Section 260923 “Lighting Control Devices” for occupancy sensors, timers, controlvoltage switches, and control voltage dimmers

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. Note this Section may include products not required for the project.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking wall plates.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Extra Stock Items: Furnish extra materials to Owner that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wiring Devices
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262726 - 2
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. RoHS compliant.

D. Comply with the following standards and UL Category Control Number (CCN) listing criteria as applicable:

1. UL 20, Standard for General-Use Snap Switches, CCN WMUZ.

2. UL 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, CCN RTRT.

3. UL 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters (Class A), CCN KCXS.

4. ANSI/NEMA WD 6 for dimensional requirements for receptacles and plugs rated up to 60A and 600V.

5. NEMA WD 1 for colors.

6. Federal Specifications:
a. FS W-S-896 for switches.
b. FS W-C-596 for receptacles.

E. Device Color:

1. White: Devices located in administrative office areas, conference rooms, break rooms, restrooms, and control rooms.

2. Gray: Devices located in electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, process areas, and outdoors.

F. Wall Plate Color: For non-metallic covers, match device color.

G. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 INDUSTRIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125V, 20A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125V, 20A

1. Manufacturers or equal:
a. Arrow-Hart (Eaton), 5362 Series.
b. Hubbell, 5362 Series.
c. Leviton, 5362 Series.

2. Description: Heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, two-pole, three-wire, and selfgrounding, NEMA 5-20R. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wiring Devices
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262726 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Duplex Weather-Resistant Receptacles, 120V, 20A. Drawing Designation: WP.

1. Hubbell, HBL5362WR Series or equal.

2. Description: Heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, weather-resistant, two-pole, three-wire, and self-grounding, NEMA 5-20R.

C. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125V, 20A. Drawing Designations GFCI.

1. Manufacturers or equal:
a. Hubbell GF5362SG Series.
b. Arrow-Hart (Eaton) TWRSGF20 Series.
c. Leviton GFTR2-3L Series.

2. Description: Extra heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, tamper-resistant, weather resistant, ground-fault circuit-interrupter receptacle, two-pole, three-wire, and selfgrounding, NEMA 5-20R. Integral GFCI with “Test” and “Reset” buttons. Three LED indicators: power solid green, GF/trip solid red, ending of life flashing red.

2.3 INDUSTRIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277V, 20A A. Manufacturers as listed below or equal.

1. Arrow-Hart (Eaton), 1220 Series.

2. Hubbell, HBL1220 Series.

3. Leviton, 1220 Series.

B. Description: Extra heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, switch, 120/277V, 20A, toggle action, flush mounting, quiet type. Single pole, double pole, three-way, or four-way, as indicated on Drawings.

2.4 WALL PLATES
A. Match gang configuration as indicated on Drawings.

B. Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer as wiring device.

C. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

D. Material for administrative offices, conference rooms, break rooms, chemistry lab, restrooms, and control rooms: Smooth, high impact thermoplastic or nylon.

E. Material for flush mounted devices in electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, and indoor process areas: Type 302 (18-8) high nickel stainless steel.

F. Material for surface mounted device plates: Same material as box.

G. WP Receptacle Cover Plates: In-use weather-resistant, heavy duty die-cast aluminum and UVresistant polycarbonate with lockable cover. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wiring Devices
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262726 - 4
100% Design Submittal
H. WP Switch Cover Plates: Weatherproof switch cover, listed to UL514D, non-metallic UVresistant, operable without opening cover, lockable. Arrow-Hart (Eaton) S2983 or equal.

2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

B. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with greeninsulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices in accordance with NFPA 70, manufacturer’s instructions, and listing for each device.

B. Install switch and receptacle outlets flush with finished wall for new wall construction and where existing wall is stud and sheetrock construction.

C. Drawings show the general location of devices unless dimensioned. Adjust and coordinate location to avoid piping or other obstructions.

D. Use of one GFCI receptacle to protect downstream conventional receptacles is prohibited.

E. Device Mounting Heights (as measured to the center of the device box):

1. Switches and occupancy sensors: 48 inches AFF, located on strike side of door.

2. Wall receptacles, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
a. Process areas and shops: 36 inches AFF.
b. Administration office areas: 18 inches AFF.
c. Corridors and hallways: 18 inches AFF.
d. Electrical and mechanical rooms: 18 inches AFF.
e. Restrooms: 18 inches AFF.
f. Above counters: 8 inches above countertop or at backsplash level. g. Exterior walls: 24 inches AFG.

3. Where walls are unplastered brick or masonry, adjust mounting height above so one horizontal edge of device box lines up with a horizontal joint in the masonry.

F. Device Boxes:

1. Install correct size and type box for the device(s) and location, allowing for adequate space for conductors, connectors, clamps, devices, and barriers, where required. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wiring Devices
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262726 - 5
100% Design Submittal

2. Install boxes level, plumb, and secure. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls.

G. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

H. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. Provide adequate length of free conductors at boxes for devices without pigtails.

Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the box is large enough.

I. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Make equipment grounding conductor connections and splices so removal or disconnection of any wiring devices does not interrupt continuity of the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. Do not overlap conductors.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

J. Orientation and Arrangement:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

2. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.

K. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Wiring Devices
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262726 - 6
100% Design Submittal

3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label receptacles and switches with panelboard identification and circuit number in accordance with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Label receptacles that are non-GFCI type but GFCI protected, such as from a GFCI circuit breaker, with a label “GFCI Protected.”

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify correct operation of GFCI receptacles using GFCI tester.

B. Verify correct voltage and phasing at receptacles.

1. Use receptacle circuit tester for NEMA 5-20R receptacles. Use voltmeter for other receptacles.

2. Use phase sequence meter for three phase receptacles.

C. Correct deficiencies found and reverify.

D. Prepare field quality report certifying verification of correct installation.

END OF SECTION 262726
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fuses
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262813 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:
a. Control circuits.
b. Panelboards.
c. Switchboards.
d. Enclosed controllers.
e. Enclosed switches.

B. Related Requirements:

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit in PDF format.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fuses
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262813 - 2
100% Design Submittal

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.

2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the Project. Submit in PDF format.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Bussmann; Eaton, Electrical Sector.

2. Littelfuse, Inc.

3. Mersen USA.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fuses
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262813 - 3
100% Design Submittal

1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

2. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

3. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

4. Type CD: 600-V, 31- to 60-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

5. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay, Class RK5, time delay, and Class J, time delay.

2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay and Class RK5, time delay, time delay.

3. Power Electronics Circuits: Class J, high speed.

4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay, Class RK5, time delay, and Class J, time delay.

5. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer duty.

6. Provide open-fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Fuses
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262813 - 4
100% Design Submittal

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.

END OF SECTION 262813
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Nonfusible switches.

2. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

3. Enclosures.

B. Related Requirements:

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 2
100% Design Submittal
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 3
100% Design Submittal

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 18 deg F and not exceeding 122 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 3000 feet.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Ensure enclosed switches and circuit breakers withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.”

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by UL or a NRTL if approved by the Owner and/or Engineer and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 4
100% Design Submittal

1. ABB, Electrification Business.

2. Eaton.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.

4. Square D; Schneider Electric USA.

5. Or equal.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground conductors.

2. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating - 120 V AC.

3. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. ABB Electrification Installations Products.

2. Eaton.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division.

4. Square D; Schneider Electric USA.

B. Provide circuit breakers constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Ensure current carrying components are completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.

C. Verify circuit breakers have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles, which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. Verify the circuit-breaker handle is over center, trip free, and resides in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip indication. Clearly marked circuit-breaker escutcheon on and off in addition to providing international I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.

D. Mark the maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems, and corresponding interrupting ratings on face of circuit breaker. Ensure circuit breakers are 100 percent rated. Verify fuse/circuit breaker combinations for series connected interrupting ratings listed by UL as recognized component combinations. Mark any series rated combination used on the end-use equipment along with the statement "Caution - Series Rated System."
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 5
100% Design Submittal
E. Equip MCCBs with a device for locking in the isolated position.

F. Ensure lugs are suitable for 194 deg F rated wire, sized according to the 167 deg F temperature rating in NFPA 70.

G. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

H. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

1. Instantaneous trip.

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

I. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

J. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (5-mA trip).

K. Ground-Fault Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

L. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

8. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

9. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; removable key only when circuit breaker is in off position.

11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault trip unit; for interlocking groundfault protection function.

12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 6
100% Design Submittal

2.5 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Enclosure Finish: Finish the enclosure with gray baked enamel paint or Owner approved color and paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1) gray baked enamel paint or Owner approved color and paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized galvannealed steel (NEMA 250 Types 3R, 12) a brush finish on Type 304 stainless steel (NEMA 250 Type 4-4X 316 stainless steel or fiberglass if approved by Owner and Engineer).

C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 verify enclosures contain no knockouts.

NEMA 250.

D. Operating Mechanism: Ensure the circuit-breaker operating handle is externally operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. Verify the cover interlock mechanism has an externally operated override. Ensure the override does not permanently disable the interlock mechanism, which returns to the locked position once the override is released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism is not required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock.

E. Ensure enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X 316 stainless steel, 12, or 12K have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the enclosure cover when the circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is open.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Commencement of work indicates Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer's and Owner's written permission.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 7
100% Design Submittal

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 gasketed.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

3. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install fuses in fusible devices.

F. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 8
100% Design Submittal
C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

D. Tests and Inspections for Switches:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean.
d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Verify bolt-torque levels in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.
h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
i. Verify correct phase barrier installation.
j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces.

2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values not to exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 9
100% Design Submittal
d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.
e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low-Voltage."
E. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Verify bolt-torque levels in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units.

2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with circuit breaker closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.
c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values not to exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Renovation & Expansion Final Design 262816 - 10
100% Design Submittal
d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.

Ensure applied potential is 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600- V rated cable. Test duration is one minute. For units with solid state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. Verify insulation resistance values are no less than two megohms.
e. Determine the following by primary current injection:
1) Long-time pickup and delay. Pickup values as specified. Trip characteristics not to exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.
2) Short-time pickup and delay. Short-time pickup values as specified. Trip characteristics not to exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 3) Ground-fault pickup and time delay. Ground-fault pickup values as specified. Trip characteristics not to exceed manufacturer's published timecurrent characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 4) Instantaneous pickup. Instantaneous pickup values as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances.

3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 262816
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits Renovation & Expansion Final Design 264313 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Surge protective devices (SPDs) for power distribution systems. SPDs installed integral to electrical equipment meets electrical performance criteria specified herein.

SPDs for telecommunications systems, antenna systems, SCADA systems and instruments are included in other Divisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. In: Nominal discharge current.

B. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The maximum designated RMS value of the power frequency voltage that may be continuously applied to the mode of protection of an SPD.

C. Metal-Oxide Varistor (MOV): An electronic component with a significant bidirectional, nonlinear current-voltage characteristic.

D. Mode(s), Modes of Protection, or Protection Modes: Electrical paths where the SPD offers defense against transient overvoltages. Examples include: line to neutral (L-N), line to ground (L-G), line to line (L-L), and neutral to ground (N-G).

E. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

F. Type 1 SPDs: Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation between the secondary of the service transformer and the line side of the service disconnect overcurrent device.

G. Type 2 SPDs: Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation on the load side of the service disconnect overcurrent device, including SPDs located at the branch panel.

H. Type 3 SPDs: Point of utilization SPDs.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits Renovation & Expansion Final Design 264313 - 2
100% Design Submittal
I. Type 4 SPDs: Component SPDs, including discrete components, as well as assemblies.

J. Type 5 SPDs: Discrete component surge suppressors, such as MOVs that may be mounted on a printed wiring board, connected by its leads or provided within an enclosure with mounting means and wiring terminations.

K. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): A rating selected from UL 1449 list of preferred values assigned to each mode of protection.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. Include physical and electrical characteristics, features, and options.

B. Specification Compliance:

1. Include a copy of this specification confirming compliance with each paragraph. For deviations, provide detailed commentary to explain the deviation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Warranty documentation.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SPDs for a period not less than warranty specified in PART 2 for each model described.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, ABB, Eaton, Schneider Electric, or Siemens products are acceptable.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain devices from single source from single manufacturer. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits Renovation & Expansion Final Design 264313 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing agency recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. UL 96A, Lightning Protection System Master Label.

2. UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters for EMI/RFI noise filtration.

3. UL 1449, Surge Protective Devices, CCN VZCA.

C. MCOV: Not less than 115 percent.

D. Nominal discharge current (Iₙ): 20 kA, unless noted otherwise.

E. Maximum VPR:

1. 277 V (L-N), Systems: 1200 V.

2. 240 V (L-L) Systems: 1200 V.

3. 120 V (L-N) Systems: 700 V.

F. Type 1 or 2, as indicated by connection point on Drawings. Include integral disconnect for Type 1 SPDs.

G. Match voltage, phasing, and frequency of connected power system equipment to be protected.

H. Provide all modes of protection based on the power system configuration.

I. Verify the SCCR rating of the SPD has at least the same rating of the electrical equipment being protected.

J. Protect against surges produced by a 1.2 / 50 microsecond and 8 / 20 microsecond combination waveform generator.

K. Provide LED indicator lights for continuous positive operational status of each protected phase.

Lights to be visible without the need to open any compartments.

L. Response Time: One nanosecond or less for any individual component and be self-restoring and fully automatic.

M. Switchboard, branch panels and control panels, up to 600 A equipment bus (480 V): Minimum surge current 100 kA per phase, nominal discharge current 65 kA, 5-year warranty.

N. Branch circuit panels (120/208/240 V single or three phase): Minimum surge current 50 kA per phase, nominal discharge current 10 kA, 5-year warranty. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits Renovation & Expansion Final Design 264313 - 4
100% Design Submittal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Layout disconnect and SPD locations to minimize SPD lead length to less than 24 inches and to avoid sharp bends or kinks in leads. Rearrange circuit breakers as necessary in panelboards to achieve.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install SPDs as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install SPD lead conductors as short as possible (not to exceed 24 inches), gently twist together where practicable with wire size, and route to avoid sharp bends or kinks. Do not splice or extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer and approved by Engineer.

Spliced extensions using wire nuts are unacceptable.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.

2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's installation requirements.

B. SPDs that do not pass tests and inspections will be considered defective.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Complete startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where alarm contacts report to SCADA system, confirm correct operation.

C. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests; reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.

D. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

END OF SECTION 264313
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 265000 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 265000 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Luminaires, components, and accessories.

B. Related Requirements:

2. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" specifies automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors installed by this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BUG Rating: Backlight, uplight, and glare rating for light pollution from exterior luminaires.

B. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): The absolute temperature (in kelvins) of a blackbody whose chromaticity (color quality) most nearly resembles that of the light source.

C. Color Rendering Index (CRI): The measure of the degree of color shift objects undergo when illuminated by the light source as compared with the color of those same objects when illuminated by a reference light source. The lower the CRI of a light source, the more difficult it is to identify colors and stripes on electronic components and wiring.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project.

1. Include physical data to confirm compliance with luminaire schedule. Include description, features, accessories, finishes, and dimensions of luminaires.

2. Include electrical and lighting data to confirm compliance with luminaire schedule.

Include voltage, design life, lumen output, CCT, CRI, photometric data, and energy efficiency data.

3. Organize luminaire data in sequential order based on the luminaire schedule. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 265000 - 2
100% Design Submittal

5. Include support accessories as applicable.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Where exterior luminaires deviate in lumen output or photometrics from the basis of design luminaire, submit site photometric plan to verify performance requirements and compliance with local lighting ordinances at property line boundaries.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers' published instructions.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Warranty documentation.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.

C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

D. Each LED luminaire type binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect exposed surface finishes on lighting equipment by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Store luminaires in a dry location in their original packaging, until ready for installation.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installed agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 265000 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Luminaires, Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Comply with the following standards and UL Category Control Number (CCN) listing criteria as applicable:

1. UL 924, Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. a. UL CCN FTBR, emergency lighting.
b. UL CCN FWBO, exit lighting.

2. UL 1598, Luminaires (non-hazardous locations).
a. UL CCN HYXT, general luminaires and fittings.
b. UL CCN IFAM, surface mount LED luminaires.
c. UL CCN IFAW, canopy luminaires.
d. UL CCN IFAO, recess mount LED luminaires.
e. UL CCN CDHW, fire resistant luminaires.

3. UL 8750, Standard for Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products.

C. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Refer to luminaire schedule on Drawings for detailed requirements for each luminaire type.

Catalog numbers listed on schedules are provided as a design basis for performance and quality desired. Equivalent design and quality from other manufacturers will be acceptable upon Engineer’s approval.

B. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components to be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

4. Steel: ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel, ASTM A568/A568M for sheet steel.

5. Stainless Steel: Manufacturer's standard grade, ASTM A240/A240M.

6. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M.

7. Aluminum: ASTM B209.

C. Variations in metal finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 265000 - 4
100% Design Submittal
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.

2.3 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Refer to Drawings for support details.

C. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish to match fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 3, soft-temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Engineer, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with the following:

1. Relevant Article of NFPA 70.

2. NECA NEIS 500 – Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems.

3. NECA NEIS 501 – Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 265000 - 5
100% Design Submittal

4. NECA NEIS 502 – Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems.

C. Special Installation Techniques:

1. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished floor or grade unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fasten luminaire to structural support. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

3. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” and Section 260533.13 “Conduits for Electrical Systems” for wiring connections and wiring methods.

4. Install luminaires at height and aiming angle as indicated on Drawings.

5. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

6. Comply with details indicated on Drawings.

7. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 “Identification for Electrical Systems” to identify luminaires, system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.

D. Systems Integration: Integrate lighting control devices and equipment with electrical power connections for operation of luminaires as specified.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each luminaire for damage and cleanliness. Replace damaged luminaires and components. Remove debris and clean luminaire prior to tests, inspections, and acceptance by Engineer.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. General Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper control operation in all modes.

2. Emergency Lighting Operational Test: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

3. Emergency Lighting Discharge Test: Interrupt normal power supply and confirm adequate illumination is provided for 90 minutes while on battery power.

C. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare field quality report certifying verification of correct installation.

END OF SECTION 265000
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Lighting
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 265000 - 6
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Division 28
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 284621.13 - CONVENTIONAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Fire alarm control unit (existing).

2. Manual fire alarm boxes.

3. System smoke detectors.

4. Heat detectors.

5. Notification appliances.

6. Device guards.

7. Remote annunciator.

8. System printer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Engineer.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with one of the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design b. NICET-certified fire alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, and profiles and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 2
100% Design Submittal
C. Shop Drawings: For fire alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.

5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.

6. Include battery size calculations.

7. Include input/output matrix.

8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.

10. Verify that each duct smoke detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing zone designation of each device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke (and heat, if any) detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke (and heat, if any) detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for fire alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 3
100% Design Submittal

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Provide the "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.
d. Riser diagram.
e. Record copy of site-specific software.
f. Provide the "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:
1) Equipment tested.
2) Frequency of testing of installed components.
3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire alarm control unit and each annunciator unit.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 4
100% Design Submittal

3. Smoke and Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamper proofed components.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project or certified by NICET as fire alarm level II installation (minimum) technician.

B. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.

C. Use of Devices During Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service, and label existing fire alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire alarm equipment and wiring.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 5
100% Design Submittal

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Source Limitations for Fire Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with existing Silent Knight SK-5208 Conventional Fire Alarm Panel and operate as an extension of existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded system dedicated to fire alarm service only.

C. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors (if any).

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Duct smoke detectors (supervisory signal).

5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

B. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm zone at fire alarm control unit and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm mode.

5. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

6. Activate emergency lighting control.

7. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

8. Record events in the system memory.

9. Record events by the system printer.

10. Indicate device in alarm on the remote annunciator. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 6
100% Design Submittal
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

3. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of primary power at fire alarm control unit.

4. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire alarm control unit.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire alarm control unit.

6. Break in standby battery circuitry.

7. Failure of battery charging.

8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire alarm control unit or annunciator.

9. Hose cabinet door open.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.

2. Annunciate at fire alarm control unit and remote annunciators.

3. Record the event on system printer.

4. After a time-delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

5. Transmit system status to building management system.

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Fire alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

2.4 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. The existing fire alarm control unit is a Silent Knight model SK-5208 conventional multizone system with 10 Initiation inputs, 8 Class B (Style B) and 2 zones. Per device datasheet, supervised zone expanders and I/O modules can be mounted remotely from the main control panel.

B. Circuits:

1. Pathway Survivability: Level 0.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 7
100% Design Submittal

2. Serial Interfaces:
a. One existing RS 232 port available for printer, and programming.

C. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire alarm control unit.

2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire alarm control unit and detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.

4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

5. Cancel fire alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

D. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound a three-pulse temporal pattern .

E. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

F. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for zone, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

G. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory, and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

H. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid.

I. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.5 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 8
100% Design Submittal

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be four or two-wire type, consistent with and in-line with current installations.

3. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and poweron status.

5. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor, with alarm-verification feature.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268.

C. Ionization Smoke Detector: Comply with UL 268.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Remote indication and test station. Operating key switch initiates an alarm test.

2. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

3. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

4. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.7 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting or twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 9
100% Design Submittal
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:
a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place.

4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush or Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1 consistent with the existing installations.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.10 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire alarm control unit and automatically capture one or two] telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service online is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 10
100% Design Submittal
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.

3. LED display.

4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

5. Communications failure with the central station or fire alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Zone of the alarm initiating device.

2. Zone of the supervisory signal.

3. Zone of the trouble initiating device.

4. Loss of ac supply.

5. Loss of power.

6. Low battery.

7. Abnormal test signal.

8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.11 SYSTEM PRINTER
A. Printer shall be listed and labeled as an integral part of fire alarm system.

2.12 DEVICE GUARDS
A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer.

2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 11
100% Design Submittal
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to the existing control panel in the existing part of the building.

2. Connect new equipment to the existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.

3. Expand, modify, and supplement the existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary to extend the existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with the existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor.

D. Manual Fire Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

E. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A or Annex B in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from ceiling mounted, and 60 inches from wall mounted air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

6. Luminaires: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a luminaire and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

F. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place, except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 12
100% Design Submittal
G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.

1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.3 PATHWAYS
A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect supervised interface devices to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

2. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire alarm control unit. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 13
100% Design Submittal
B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field tests shall be witnessed by owner’s representative and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct the visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in Chapter 10 "Fundamentals," Section

10.18.21 "Completion Documents, Preparation."
b. Comply with NFPA 72, Chapter 14, "Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance," Section 14.3, "Inspection" and the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with NFPA 72, Chapter 14, "Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance," Section 14.4 "Testing" and the "Test Methods" Table.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

D. Fire alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire alarm system.

END OF SECTION 284621.13
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Conventional Fire Alarm Systems Renovation & Expansion Final Design 284621.13 - 14
100% Design Submittal

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Division 31
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work includes:

1. Excavation for structures, foundations, manholes, vaults, electrical manholes, conduits, cables, raceways and ducts, pipes, paving; bulk excavations; grading; and related work such as sheeting, bracing and dewatering.

2. Clearing and stripping, procurement of on-site and imported fill material, excavating, placing, and compacting fill and backfill, structural excavating and backfilling, transportation and storage of excess earthwork materials; disposal of unsuitable, waste, and surplus materials; restoration of excavation and trench surfaces; and subsidiary work necessary to complete the grading of developed areas to conform with required lines, grades, and slopes.

3. Site and geotechnical report review.

4. Do not initiate extra work without written notification to Owner and Engineer and receiving Owner’s written approval in response.

5. Protect existing structures and utilities that remain.

6. Delegated design.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312333 “Trenching and Backfilling” for stated work.

2. Section 321623 “Sidewalks”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

C. Coverage: Pass of compaction equipment over the complete surface area of exposed lift or subgrade to receive compaction.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 2
100% Design Submittal
D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work]

2. Unauthorized Additional Excavation: Excavation as directed by Engineer to correct work not in compliance with Contract Documents, which will be performed without additional compensation.

3. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feetin width and more than 30 feetin length.

4. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, provided without additional compensation.

E. Finished Grade: Required final grade elevation indicated on Drawings. Spot elevations take precedent over proposed contours.

F. In-the-Dry: An excavation subgrade where groundwater level: has been lowered to at least 2 feetbelow lowest level of excavation; is stable with no ponded water, mud, or muck; is able to support construction equipment without rutting or disturbance; and is suitable for placement and compaction of fill material, pipe, or concrete foundations.

G. Objectionable Material: Includes topsoil, organic matter, contaminated soil, construction debris, perishable materials, snow, ice, frozen earth, and rocks or lumps of cemented soils over 6 inchesin maximum dimension.

H. Optimum Moisture Content: Moisture content (percent by dry weight) corresponding to maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM Test Method D1557.

I. Overexcavation: Removal of unsuitable soil or objectionable material at or below the normal grade of excavation or subgrade as indicated on Drawings.

J. Percent Compaction: Required in-place dry density of the material, expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density of the same material, as determined in the laboratory by ASTM Test Method D1557.

K. Structures: Buildings, wet wells, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, manholes and vaults, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

L. Subgrade: Required surface of subsoil, borrow fill, or compacted fill that is immediately beneath site improvements, especially dimensioned fill, paving, or other surfacing material.

M. Unsuitable Soil: Includes existing fill materials, organic soils, weak native soils, or clays with a plasticity index of greater than 30, and any materials that cannot be properly placed and compacted as specified.

N. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 3
100% Design Submittal
O. Zone of Influence: A line extending at least 2 feetbeyond foundation or pipeline edge, then outward and downward at a slope of 1 horizontal to 1 vertical. Do no excavation below foundation of existing structures or pipeline.

P. Professional Engineer: Registered Professional Engineer meeting project qualifications and who is hired by Contractor.

Q. The Engineer: The Engineer or designated representative hired by Owner.

1. Approval given by The Engineer does not relieve responsibilities for performing the work in accordance with Contract Document requirements.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct pre-excavation conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service.
c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and plant-protection zones.
d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade.
e. Field quality control.
f. Phasing of the Work.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate various submittal types required by this Section with requirements of support of excavation and rock removal submittals specified in other Sections.

B. Site Characterization Data: Submit following information regarding off-site source and material:

1. Site location.

2. Present and past usage of the source site and material.

3. Previously existing reports associated with an assessment of source site relating to presence of oil or other hazardous materials.

4. Location within the site from which the material will be obtained.

C. Samples: Submit a representative sample weighing approximately 50 poundsof each fill material, filter sand, and crushed stone contained in sealed 5 gallon containers, at least 30 calendar days prior to date of anticipated use of each material.

D. Submit laboratory test results for fill materials that include maximum density, gradation, Atterberg limits, sand equivalent, and other applicable criteria, at least 72 hours prior to importing or placing fill.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 4
100% Design Submittal

1.6 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For temporary excavation slope stability evaluation designs; Section 014000 “Quality Requirements” for additional delegated design requirements.

B. Slope Stability Evaluation: Submit a temporary excavation slope stability evaluation in accordance with OSHA for temporary slopes over 20 feet in height or where existing or proposed facilities or property limits are located at the top of the slope and within a distance from the top of the slope equal to the slope height.

1. Prepare evaluation by a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of California where the work occurs.

C. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Construction and Operations Plan: Submit proposed methods of construction, including earthwork operations, excavation limits, slopes, fill material moisture conditioning and handling, compaction equipment, excavation support systems designs, backfilling and filling and compaction, and material sources.

1. Submit work sequence plan.

2. Submit excavation support system plan as prepared by registered Professional Engineer complying with requirements stated in previous Article.

B. Submit copies of field daily reports by soil technician at the end of each work day that earthwork and grading operations occur.

C. Upon completion of earthwork and grading operations, submit an as-graded map showing density test numbers and locations, a table of density test results and depths, and a certification of compliance by geotechnical engineer in charge.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency to conduct geotechnical observation, testing and documentation. include qualifications of firm, resumes of soil technicians assigned to the project, and licensed geotechnical engineer in charge.

1. Firm Qualifications: Meet ASTM D3740.

2. Soil Technicians: Have minimum three years demonstrated experience in earthwork and grading operations and satisfy certification requirements of agency having local jurisdiction.
a. The Engineer reserves right to request substitution of soil technicians assigned to field work. Do not substitute assigned soil technicians without prior approval of The Engineer.

E. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 5
100% Design Submittal

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the jurisdiction of the project location.

B. Excavation, trenching, sheeting, bracing, and similar work complies with requirements of OSHA excavation safety standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P and State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Where conflict between OSHA, State and local regulations exists, apply most stringent requirements.

C. At least three working days prior to starting any excavation, notify the appropriate regional notification center for underground utilities and underground utility owners who are not members of notification center, DigAlert, https://www.digalert.org/.

D. Quality Control Testing for Off-site Borrow Materials:

1. Chemical testing will not be required where site characterization of off-site borrow sources indicates that soils are acceptable for use. If site characterization data or materials are suspected of being contaminated, perform chemical testing as directed by The Engineer with no additional compensation.

2. Chemical Test Data: Test each material source requiring testing by a person experienced in sample collection who is a registered Professional Engineer or geologist or certified groundwater or environmental professional registered in the State of California. Submit samples of each proposed material to a chemical analytical laboratory, certified by the governing agency, for following analyses:
a. Volatile Organic Compounds: EPA 8240 plus Hazardous Substance List (HSL) Parameters.
b. Acid and Base Neutral Extractable Organic Compounds: EPA 8270. c. Pesticides and PCBs: EPA 8080.
d. Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons: Infrared Method, EPA 9071/418.1. e. Thirteen Priority Pollutant Metals: EPA 7000 Series. f. Total Cyanide: EPA 9012.

3. Obtain and test off-site borrow samples in accordance with criteria established by The Engineer. Submit results for review and approval prior to use on site.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Be responsible for construction layout and reference staking necessary for proper control and satisfactory completion of structures, cutting, filling, grading, drainage, fencing, embankment improvements, curbing, and other appurtenances.

B. Perform construction layout and staking by a Professional Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in State of California where project occurs, experienced and skilled in construction layout and staking requirements.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 6
100% Design Submittal
C. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earthwork operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify DigAlert for area where Project is located before beginning earthwork operations.

E. Do not commence earthwork operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place, as required.

F. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

G. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. On-Site Fill Material: Earth and rock material obtained at project site during excavation, following clearing and stripping, from which any Unsuitable Soil or Objectionable Material has been removed.

B. General: Provide imported fill materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, fencing, landscaping, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

1. If necessary, remove and restore or replace curbing, driveway aprons, and fencing after performing backfilling work.

2. Replace existing facilities damaged by construction with new material fully equal to existing without additional compensation.

B. Prior to and During Earthwork Operations:

1. Use excavation support system for excavations within the zone of influence for existing structures or utilities.

2. Do not permit excavations below base level of adjacent foundations or retaining walls, unless excavation design and bracing includes an analysis of structure’s stability ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 7
100% Design Submittal
supported by the foundation. When necessary due to project conditions, incorporate required bracing and foundation underpinning.

C. Test Pits:

1. Perform exploratory excavation work, test pits, for purpose of verifying the location of underground utilities and structures and to check for unknown utilities and structures, prior to commencing excavation work.

2. As earthwork progresses, perform test pits for the purpose of compaction testing. Pause operations and provide safe access for testing personnel.

3. Backfill and compact test pits as soon as desired information has been obtained. Stabilize backfilled surfaces in accordance with approved erosion and sedimentation control plans.

D. Clearing and Stripping. Initially clear and strip ground surfaces beneath planned structures and in areas requiring excavation or filling of organic material and debris. Do not use those materials as On-Site Fill Material; remove from the site and properly disposed or reused as topsoil in landscape areas.

1. After clearing of walkways, trees, and turf, excavate soils to a minimum depth of 50- inches below grade and at least 5-feet horizontally beyond the new-building perimeter.

Strip footings not to exceed 24-inch width or embedment depth. Excavation depths may increase if exposed native materials at 60-inches exhibit visible macroporosity.

E. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

F. Saw cut existing pavement with a saw, wheel, or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating.

3.2 DEWATERING AND DRAINAGE
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff and groundwater seepage away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

C. Prior to excavation, verify groundwater will be at required.

D. Accomplish dewatering by methods that preserve undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Dewater in a manner to prevent boiling, detrimental under-seepage, or disturbance at excavation base.

3.3 SUPPORT OF EXCAVATION
A. Provide excavation support if required.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 8
100% Design Submittal
B. Install excavation support in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings prior to beginning excavation work. Maintain excavation supports that are required to remain in place, if applicable, as indicated on Drawings or as required by approved Shop Drawings.

C. Owner or The Engineer may direct that certain excavation supports remain in place or be cut off at any specific elevation. Supports directed by Owner or The Engineer to be left in place and not so designated on Contract Documents will be paid for according to Contract provisions for [unit prices] [changes in the Work].

D. The right of Owner or The Engineer to direct that certain excavation supports remain in place not to be construed as creating any obligation on Owner or The Engineer to give such direction, nor does failure to give such direction relieve liability for damages to persons or property occurring from or upon the work occasioned by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure to leave in place sufficient excavation supports to prevent any movement of the ground or damage to adjacent structures.

E. Construct temporary excavation slopes in accordance with the requirements of OSHA excavation safety standards and approved Shop Drawings.

F. Where allowed, carefully remove excavation supports in a manner without endangering the Work or other adjacent structures, utilities, or property. Immediately fill voids left or caused by withdrawal of supports with sand and compact.

3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Include material of every description and of whatever substance encountered as an unclassified excavation.

B. General: Excavate on-site soils using standard earthmoving equipment. Excavation in dense soil or rock may require special equipment. Do not plough, scrape, or dig earth with machinery so near to finished subgrade to result in excavation of or disturbance of below grade material.

C. Make excavations to grades indicated on Drawings and in widths sufficient for laying of pipe, construction of the structure, installing bracing, excavation supports, dewatering and drainage facilities, and working clearances.

D. Perform excavation in-the-dry and accomplished by methods which preserve the natural undisturbed condition of subgrade soils.

E. Moisture Sensitive Soils: Use a smooth-edge bucket to excavate last one foot of depth when excavation is to end in such soils.

F. If excavation bottom is removed below the limits shown on Drawings, specified, or directed by The Engineer, refill with structural fill, lean concrete, or other material satisfactory to The Engineer without additional compensation.

G. When excavation has reached prescribed depths, notify The Engineer who will observe the conditions. If materials and conditions are not satisfactory, The Engineer will issue instructions for corrective procedures. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether the work has been accomplished satisfactorily.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 9
100% Design Submittal
H. Subgrade soils that have become soft, loose, quick, or otherwise unsatisfactory due to inadequate excavation, dewatering, or other construction methods in the opinion of The Engineer, remove existing soil and replaced with structural fill or lean concrete as acceptable to The Engineer at Contractor's expense.

I. Proof roll exposed subgrades for foundations with at least two overlapping coverages of a vibratory drum roller with a minimum static drum weight of 10 ton. Conduct proof-rolling in presence of The Engineer. The Engineer will waive this requirement, if in its opinion the subgrade will be rendered unsuitable by such proof-rolling.

1. Confined Areas: Proof-roll with hand operated vibratory equipment that is approved by The Engineer.

J. Perform overexcavation at The Engineer’s request to remove unsuitable soil, objectionable material, or other materials as determined by The Engineer and to such depth and width as directed. Replace with suitable material as directed by The Engineer.

1. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

K. Perform excavation for pipelines beneath structures and excavation for footings with excavating equipment operating from the subgrade for the structure, while in-the-dry and in a manner preserving the undisturbed state of subgrade soils.

L. When excavations have reached the required subgrade, including any allowances for working mats or base materials and prior to their placement, notify soils testing laboratory to verify suitability of existing subgrade soils for anticipated foundation and structural loadings.

1. If existing subgrade soils are determined to be unsuitable, follow direction provided by The Engineer regarding removal and replacement with suitable materials.

2. Notify Engineer if the revised work scope would modify cost and thereby entitle a change to the Contract Sum. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

M. Replace overexcavation beyond the limits and depths required by Contract Documents using structural fill, lean concrete, or other material satisfactory to The Engineer without additional compensation.

N. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrowtine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3.5 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 10
100% Design Submittal
B. Maintain excavated subgrade in-the-dry condition.

C. Prior to fill placement, remove objectionable material which includes, but not be limited to, pavement, topsoil, organic matter, contaminated soil, construction debris, perishable materials, snow, ice, frozen earth, and rocks or lumps of cemented soils over 6 inches in maximum dimension.

D. For subgrades consisting of granular soils, proof roll the final subgrade using at least four coverages of a vibrator plate compactor.

E. Where existing subgrade contains a significant amount of clay or cohesive soils, over-excavate sufficiently below the bottom of structure for placement of a lean concrete working mat.

Remove loose or soft material from the subgrade immediately prior to placing lean concrete working mat.

F. Remove and replace soft subgrades or unusable material with structural fill, lean concrete, or other material satisfactory to the.

G. During wet or freezing weather, or in areas where exposed subgrade consists of moisturesensitive soils, take measures to protect foundation excavations once they have been approved by The Engineer. Protective measures include, but are not limited to, placing insulation blankets, placing a layer of fill, pea gravel, crushed rock, or lean concrete on the exposed subgrade, or covering the exposed subgrade with a plastic tent.

1. If additional overexcavation is required due to the subgrade not being protected against wet or freezing weather, perform additional work without additional compensation.

H. Notify Engineer to observe conditions following subgrade preparation and prior to fill placement. If existing subgrade soils are determined to be unsuitable, follow direction provided by The Engineer regarding removal and replacement with suitable materials.

1. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

Protect from precipitation.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.7 FILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION PROCEDURES
A. Fill and Backfill: Place materials in lifts to suit specified compaction requirements to required lines and grades, making allowances for settlement and placement of cover materials, such as topsoil or sod. Correct soft spots or uncompacted areas.

B. Do not place or compact fill and backfill when materials are too wet to properly compact. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 11
100% Design Submittal

1. In-place Soil Moisture Content: Maximum of three percentage points above optimum moisture content of soil, as determined by laboratory test of moisture-density relation appropriate to specified level of compaction.

C. Structural Fill and Embankment Fill: Construct to required lines and grades, making allowances for settlement and placement of cover materials, such as topsoil and sod. Correct soft spots or uncompacted areas.

D. Ensure fill material is free of snow, ice, frost, and frozen earth. Do not place fill materials on frozen surfaces or surfaces covered by snow, ice, or frost.

E. Complete installation of dampproofing systems prior to placing various types of fill or backfill around structures.

F. If subgrade slopes more than 10 percent, step subgrade to produce a stable, horizontal surface for placement of fill materials. Scarify existing subgrade slope to a depth of at least 6 inches.

G. Compact filled slopes by slope rolling and trimming or overfill and trim back to plan grade to expose a firm, smooth surface free of loose material.

H. Do not allow fill lifts to contain stones with a dimension larger than 2/3 the specified loose measure lift thickness.

I. Perform compaction in open areas using compaction equipment by any of the following methods:

1. Fully loaded ten-wheel trucks or front-end loaders.

2. Tractor dozers weighing minimum of 30,000 pounds.

3. Heavy vibratory rollers.

J. Confined Compaction: Perform compaction in confined areas, including areas within a 45- degree angle extending upward and outward from the base of a wall, and in areas where the use of large equipment is impractical, using hand-operated vibratory equipment or mechanical tampers.

1. Do not exceed lift thickness of 6 inches, measured before compaction, when using hand operated equipment.

K. Moisture condition on-site fill material prior to placement, unless demonstrated to The Engineer in-place moisture conditioning methods can achieve the required moisture content.

L. Conduct compaction of each specified lift of fill materials by a minimum of four complete coverages with acceptable compaction equipment to a specified density as a percentage of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557, unless otherwise specified.

M. Use structural fill required beneath foundations or slabs on grade, except sidewalks. Place and compact structural fill in even lifts having a maximum thickness of 8 inches, measured before compaction.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 12
100% Design Submittal
N. Use select fill and backfill material placed within 10 feet of all structures. Uniformly place and compact select fill around the structure in even lifts having a maximum thickness of 6 inches, measured before compaction.

O. Use common fill in areas beyond those designated for structural fill or select fill, unless shown or otherwise specified. Place in even lifts having a maximum thickness of 6, measured before compaction.

P. Place impervious fill in controlled, even lifts having a maximum thickness (measured before compaction) of 6 inches.

1. Permeability: Compact to attain a reading of less than 1 x 10-7cm/sec.

2. Moisture Content: Compact to optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 3 percent.

3.8 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform in-place testing of compacted fill lifts to measure in-place density and water content according to ASTM D6938 and ASTM D1557.

B. Beneath Foundations and Slabs-on-Grade, except sidewalks: Compact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of fill, if applicable to:

1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 90 percent for ASTM D1557 for onsite soils or granular import, or 95 percent for ASTM D1557 for crushed-rock construction aggregates.

2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 3 percent.

C. Area Around Structures: Within 10 feet,compact each fill or backfill layer to:

1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 90 percent for ASTM D1557 for onsite soils or granular import, or 95 percent for ASTM D1557 for crushed-rock construction aggregates.

2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 3 percent.

D. Embankments, Lawn, or Unimproved Areas: Does not include embankments under roadways and earth dam structures. Compact each fill or backfill layer to:

1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 90 percent for ASTM D1557 for onsite soils or granular import, or 95 percent for ASTM D1557 for crushed-rock construction aggregates.

2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 1 percent to plus 4 percent.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 13
100% Design Submittal
E. Sidewalks: Compact each fill layer to:

1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 90 percent for ASTM D1557 for onsite soils or granular import, or 95 percent for ASTM D1557 for crushed-rock construction aggregates.

2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 3 percent.

F. Roads, Paved Areas, and Roadway Embankments: Compact each layer of fill or backfill to:

1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 90 percent for ASTM D1557 for onsite soils or granular import, or 95 percent for ASTM D1557 for crushed-rock construction aggregates.

2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 3 percent.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE, WASTE, AND SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Remove unsuitable soil, objectionable material, waste, and surplus excavated material and disposed of off-site. Materials may be temporarily stockpiled in an area within the limits of construction that does not disrupt construction activities, create any nuisances or safety hazards, or otherwise restricts access to work site.

3.10 GRADING
A. Perform grading to lines and grades shown on Drawings. Remove objectionable materials encountered within the limits indicated and disposed of off-site. Completely and continuously drained and dewatered subgrades throughout the grading process. Install temporary drains and drainage ditches to intercept or divert surface water that may affect the execution or condition of grading work.

B. If it is not possible at the time of grading to place material in its proper section of the Work, stockpile it in approved areas for later use. No additional compensation will be made for stockpiling or double handling of excavated materials.

C. In cut areas, remove loose or protruding rocks in slopes to line or finished grade of the slope.

Uniformly dress, cut, and fill slopes to slope cross-section and alignment shown on Drawings, unless otherwise directed by The Engineer.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and observe materials as described in this Article. Cooperate by allowing free access to work for selection of test materials and observations.

B. General Testing Requirements:

1. At Structures: Prior to placement of bedding material, concrete work mats, structural fill or structural concrete, coordinate with Soils Testing Laboratory to verify suitability of existing subgrade soil.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 14
100% Design Submittal

2. Backfill and Fill: Prior to and during the placement of backfill and fill coordinate with Soils Testing Laboratory to perform in-place soil density tests to verify that backfill and fill material has been placed and compacted in accordance with specified compaction requirements.
a. Provide minimum 48 hours’ notice prior to placement of backfill and fill.

3. Subgrade: Do not cover with fill without observation, testing, and approval by Soils Testing Laboratory.
a. Earthwork activities performed without properly scheduled inspection are subject to removal and replacement or additional testing as directed by The Engineer without additional compensation.

C. Test materials by a certified independent laboratory, acceptable to The Engineer, demonstrating conformance with project requirements. Deliver test reports and material certifications to The Engineer before using any material in the work.

1. Owner will make payment for laboratory and in place density testing.

D. If field test results are not in conformance with project requirements, costs involved in correcting deficiencies in compacted materials to satisfaction of The Engineer without additional compensation.

E. Earthwork activities performed without properly scheduled inspection are subject to removal and replacement or additional testing as directed by The Engineer without additional compensation.

F. Testing methods comply with latest ASTM or equivalent AASHTO Standards applicable during bidding.

G. During placement of bedding, backfill, and fill, perform in-place soil density testing to confirm that fill material has been compacted in accordance with project requirements. The Engineer may designate areas to be tested. Notify Engineer at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled compaction testing. In place soil density tests on backfill and fill material as required by authorities having jurisdiction, project geotechnical report, but in no instance, less than those listed:

1. Structures and Embankments: At least one density and moisture content test for each 2,500 square feetof surface area for each lift of fill at embankment, structure, and manhole locations.

2. Trench Excavations: At least one nuclear density and one moisture content test at a maximum of 50 feet intervals for each lift of fill placed or as directed by The Engineer.

3. The Engineer may designate supplemental areas to be tested at additional compensation.

H. Materials which have been previously tested may be subjected to further testing from time to time and may be rejected, if it is determined that results do not conform to project requirements.

Immediately remove rejected materials when directed by The Engineer, notwithstanding results of previous testing.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Earthwork
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312000 - 15
100% Design Submittal
I. The Engineer or Owner may conduct additional soil testing. Cooperate fully in allowing additional test to be made, including free access to the work.

3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by The Engineer; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Trenching and Backfilling Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312333 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 312333 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes delegated design of trench excavation and support, backfilling, and compaction.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312000 “Earthwork” for related earthwork activities.

2. Section 331416 “Site Water Utility Distribution Piping” for water piping and bedding from building to utility service.

3. Section 333100 “Sanitary Sewerage Piping” for sanitary sewer piping and bedding from building to utility service.

1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. Basis of Measurement: By linear feet of trench to be excavated.

B. Basis of Payment: Includes excavating existing soil.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Percent Compaction: Means at least the stated percentage of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557, Method D.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposed method of backfilling and compaction prior to start of Work.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: For material excavated from trench for re-use as backfill, by a qualified testing agency.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Trenching and Backfilling Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312333 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with following regulations:

1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store excavated materials to prevent erosion of soil type materials and contamination of adjacent water sources.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine that erosion and sedimentation controls are in place and comply with project requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.2 PREPARATION
A. Where excavation activities occur across active vehicular or pedestrian circulation paths, use temporary controls specified in Division 01 to maintain circulation during operations required by this Section. Maintain temporary controls for each day circulation paths are restricted.

B. Coordinate work of this Section with materials specified in other Sections of Division 31.

C. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

D. Protect features to remain-in-place including benchmarks, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, curbs, etc. from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

E. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.

2.3 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Trench excavation includes material of every description and substance encountered, except rock and boulders.

B. Cut rigid and flexible pavement with a saw, wheel, or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating.

C. Strip and stockpile topsoil from grassed areas crossed by trenches.

1. At Contractor's option when required, topsoil may be disposed of and replaced with approved topsoil of equal quality.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Trenching and Backfilling Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312333 - 3
100% Design Submittal
D. While excavating and backfilling is in progress, maintain traffic and protect utilities and other property.

E. Excavate trenches to indicated depths and in widths sufficient and of practical minimum for pipe laying, bracing, and pumping and drainage facilities.

F. Accomplish excavation and dewatering by methods preserving undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Excavate trench by machinery to or just below designated subgrade, if material remaining in trench bottom is no more than slightly disturbed.

1. Remove subgrade soils that become soft, loose, quick, or otherwise unsatisfactory due to inadequate excavation, dewatering, or other construction methods and replace with screened gravel fill acceptable to the Engineer at Contractor's expense.

G. Use care when working in clay and organic silt soils, which are particularly susceptible to disturbance due to construction operations. When excavation is to end in such soils, use a smooth-edge bucket to excavate the last 12 inches of depth.

H. Where pipe is to be laid in screened gravel bedding, excavate trench by machinery to normal depth of pipe, provided material remaining in trench bottom is no more than slightly disturbed.

I. Where pipe is to be laid directly on trench bottom, manually perform final excavation, providing a flat-bottom, true to grade upon undisturbed material. Make bell holes required by project conditions.

2.4 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Stack excavated material without excessive surcharge on trench bank or obstructing free access to hydrants and gate valves. Avoid inconvenience to traffic and abutters. Segregated excavated material for use in backfilling as specified below.

B. Do not remove excavated material from work site, except as directed by the Engineer. When removal of surplus materials is approved by the Engineer, dispose of such surplus material in approved designated areas.

C. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to trench, haul and store material at a location provided. When required, re-handled and use it in backfilling trench.

2.5 SHEETING AND BRACING
A. Provide and maintain sheeting and bracing required by Federal, State, or local safety requirements to support sides of excavation and prevent loss of ground which could endanger personnel, damage, adjacent structures, or delay the work.

1. Engineer may order additional supports placed at Contractor’s expense if it is determined that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided. Provide sufficiency of supports even with compliance of such order. Take care to prevent voids outside of sheeting; if voids are formed, immediately fill and ram them. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Trenching and Backfilling Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312333 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. When moveable trench bracing such as trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates are used to support trench sides, take care in placing and moving the boxes or supporting bracing to prevent pipe movement, disturbance of pipe bedding, or screened gravel backfill.

1. Rigid Pipe Installation (such as R.C., V.C., A.C.): Raise that portion of box extending below mid-diameter above this point prior to moving box ahead to install next pipe.

Perform to prevent separation of installed pipe joints due to box movement.

2. Flexible Pipe Installation (such as PVC): Do not allow trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring, or plates to extend below mid-diameter of pipe. As trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring, or plates are moved, place screened gravel to fill voids created. Recompact screened gravel and backfill to provide uniform side support for pipe.

C. Engineer may give permission to use steel sheeting in lieu of wood sheeting for entire job wherever sheeting use is necessary. Include cost for use of sheeting in bid items for pipe, including full compensation for driving, bracing, and later removal of sheeting.

D. Carefully remove sheeting and bracing in manner to not endanger construction of other structures, utilities, or property, whether public or private. Immediately refill voids left after withdrawal of sheeting using sand by ramming with tools especially adapted to that purpose and watering or otherwise directed by the Engineer.

E. No payment will be given for sheeting, bracing, or other support during progress of the work.

No payment will be given for sheeting left in trench for Contractor's convenience.

F. Leave sheeting driven below mid-diameter of pipe in place from driven elevation to at least 12 inches above top of pipe.

2.6 TEST PITS
A. Excavation of test pits may be required for purpose of locating underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise location of new work.

B. Backfill test pits as soon as desired information has been obtained. Maintain backfilled surface appropriate for travel until resurfaced.

2.7 EXCAVATION BELOW GRADE AND REFILL
A. Drain trench completely and effectively be in-the-dry, whatever the nature of unstable material encountered or groundwater conditions.

B. If excavating below grade through error or for their own convenience, through failure to properly dewater the trench, or disturbs subgrade before dewatering is sufficiently complete, the Engineer may direct Contractor to excavate below grade as set forth in following Paragraph, where work shall be performed at Contractor’s own expense.

C. If material at trench bottom consists of fine sand, sand and silt or soft earth which may work into the screened gravel, even with effective drainage, remove subgrade material to extent directed. Refill excavation with a 6 inch layer of coarse sand or a mixture graded from coarse sand to fine pea stone to form a filter layer preserving voids in pipe gravel bed. Obtain ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Trenching and Backfilling Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312333 - 5
100% Design Submittal
composition and gradation of gravel shall be approval by the Engineer prior to placement. Place screened gravel in 6 inch layers thoroughly compacted up to normal grade of pipe. If directed by the Engineer, use bank-run gravel for refill of excavation below grade.

D. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Non-woven filter fabric may be substituted for filter layer, if approved by the Engineer.

2.8 BACKFILLING
A. Begin backfilling as soon as practicable after laying and jointing pipe and continue expeditiously. Place bedding gravel of specified type for pipe installed up to 12 inches over the pipe.

B. Construct an impervious dam or bulkhead cutoff of clay or other impervious material in the trench, as directed by the Engineer, to interrupt unnatural flow of groundwater after construction is completed. Key dam into trench bottom and sidewalls. Provide at least one clay or other impervious material dam in pipe bedding between each manhole where directed or every 300 feet, whichever is less.

C. Where pipes are laid cross-country, fill remainder of trench with common fill material in layers not to exceed 12 inches and mounded 6 inches above existing grade or as directed by the Engineer. Where a loam or gravel surface exists prior to cross-country excavations, remove, conserve and replace it to full original depth as part of the work under pipe items. Where necessary, remove excess material during clean-up process, so that ground may be restored to its original level and condition.

D. Where pipes are laid in streets, backfill remainder of trench up to a depth of 12 inches below bottom of specified permanent paving with select common fill material in layers not to exceed 12 inches and thoroughly compacted. Use bank-run gravel for subbase layer of paving and compact in 6 inches layers.

E. To prevent longitudinal pipe movement, do not dump backfill material into trench and then spread, until selected material or screened gravel has been placed and compacted to a level at least 12 inches over the pipe.

F. Bring backfill up evenly on all sides. Thoroughly compact each layer of backfill material by rolling, tamping, or vibrating with mechanical compacting equipment or hand tamping to 95 percent compaction according to ASTM D1557 or 98 percent according to ASTM D698. If rolling, use a suitable roller or tractor being careful to compact fill throughout full width of trench.

G. Do not compact by puddling or water jetting.

H. Use hand or pneumatic ramming with tools weighing at least 20 pounds for compacting in confined areas. Spread and compact material in layers not exceeding 6 inches thick, an uncompacted loose measurement.

I. Use granular fill material as backfill around structures. Spread and compact specified backfill under and over pipes connected to structures.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Trenching and Backfilling Renovation & Expansion Final Design 312333 - 6
100% Design Submittal
J. Do not place bituminous paving in backfill. Do not use frozen material under any circumstances.

K. Broom and hose-clean road surfaces immediately after backfilling. Employ dust control measures throughout construction period.

2.9 RESTORING TRENCH SURFACE
A. Where trench occurs adjacent to paved streets, in shoulders, sidewalks, or in cross-country areas, thoroughly consolidate backfill and maintain surface as the work progresses. If settlement takes place, immediately deposit additional fill to restore ground level.

B. In and adjacent to streets, use 12 inches of trench backfill below specified initial pavement consisting of compacted bank-run gravel. If Contractor wants to use material excavated from trench as gravel subbase for pavement replacement, take samples at intervals not to exceed 500 feet of material and test by an independent testing laboratory at Contractor’s expense. Use only materials approved by the Engineer.

C. Restore surface of driveways or other areas which are disturbed by trench excavation to a condition at least equal to that existing before work began.

D. In areas where pipeline passes through grassed areas, remove and replace sod or loam and seed surface at Contractor's own expense.

END OF SECTION 312333
Division 32
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sidewalks
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 321623 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 321623 - SIDEWALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete paving for sidewalks.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 030130.71 “Modifications to Existing Concrete” for form materials, water-stops, and accessories.

2. Section 033010 “Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete” for cast-in-place or in-situ concrete for structural building frames, slabs on fill or grade, and other concrete components.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Submit required information regarding concrete.

2. Mix Design:
a. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength prior to commencement of Work.
b. Submit separate mix designs if admixtures are required for hot- and cold-weather concrete Work.
c. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures.

3. Identify chloride content of admixtures and whether or not chloride was added during manufacture.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

B. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of shop tests and inspections.

C. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sidewalks
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 321623 - 2
100% Design Submittal
D. Qualifications Statement:

1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.

B. Perform Work according to City of Redlands Standards.

C. Qualifications

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage.

B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

C. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas.

2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Minimum Conditions: Do not place concrete if base surface temperature is less than 40 deg. F, or if surface is wet or frozen.

B. Subsequent Conditions: Maintain minimum 50 deg. F, for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for remainder of curing period.

1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sidewalks
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 321623 - 3
100% Design Submittal
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Supply materials per City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Reinforcing:

1. Comply with City of Redlands Standards.

B. Hooks:

1. As required by City of Redlands Standards

2.3 MIXES
A. Concrete:

1. Comply with City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Reinforcement:

1. Comply with City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

B. Testing: Comply with ASTM C94.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify that gradients and elevations of subgrade are as indicated on Drawings.

C. Verify reinforcing placement for proper size, spacing, location, and support. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sidewalks
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 321623 - 4
100% Design Submittal

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Moisten substrate to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

B. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Subgrade:

1. As specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork.”

2. Comply with City of Redlands Standards.

B. Forms:

1. Place and secure forms and screeds to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.

2. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

3. Clean forms and coat with form oil each time before concrete is placed.

4. Wood Forms: Thoroughly wet with water before concrete is placed.

C. Reinforcement:

1. Comply with City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

D. Placing Concrete:

1. Comply with City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

E. Joints:

1. Place continuous transverse expansion joints at 5-foot intervals or width of sidewalk, whichever is less.

2. Filler:
a. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. b. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant installation.

3. Provide scored or sawn joints at 3-foot intervals between sidewalks and curbs.

4. Saw-cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at optimum time after finishing, cutting onethird into depth of slab.

5. Seal joints as required by City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

F. Exposed Aggregate:

1. Apply surface retarder where exposed aggregate finish is required.

2. Wash exposed aggregate surface with clean water and scrub with stiff bristle brush, exposing aggregate.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sidewalks
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 321623 - 5
100% Design Submittal
G. Finishing:

1. Finishing per City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

H. Curing:

1. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

2. Mats:
a. Cover exposed surface with two or more layers of wetted burlap, overlapping each other minimum 6 inches.
b. Maintain burlap continuously saturated and in contact with concrete for minimum seven days.

I. Backfilling: After curing, backfill, grade, and compact adjacent disturbed area as indicated.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.

C. Line and Grade for Forms: 1/8 inch in any 10-foot- long section.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 017300 “Execution”: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspection and Testing:

1. Comply with City of Redlands Standards and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction .

2. Samples:
a. Sampling Procedures: Comply with ASTM C172/C172M.
b. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: Comply with ASTM C31, field cured. c. Sample concrete and make one set of three cylinders for every 150 cu. yd. or less of each class of concrete placed each day, and for every 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area paving.
d. Make one additional cylinder during cold-weather concreting, and field cure.

3. Cylinder Compressive Strength:
a. Comply with ASTM C39.
b. Acceptance:
1) Average Compressive Strength of Three Consecutive Tests: Maximum 500 psi less than specified compressive strength.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sidewalks
Renovation & Expansion Final Design 321623 - 6
100% Design Submittal
c. Test one cylinder at seven days, and two cylinders at 28 days. d. Retain one cylinder for testing when requested by Engineer. e. Dispose of remaining cylinders if testing is not required.

4. Slump, Temperature, and Air Content:
a. Measure for each compressive-strength concrete sample. b. Slump: Comply with ASTM C143.
c. Air Content: Comply with ASTM C231/C231M.
d. Temperature: Comply with ASTM C1064.

5. Records:
a. Maintain records of placed concrete items.
b. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, number of test samples taken.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, rain and flowing water, and mechanical injury.

B. Do not permit traffic over paving for minimum 7 days after finishing.

C. Damaged Concrete:

1. Remove and reconstruct concrete that has been damaged for entire length between scheduled joints.

2. Refinishing damaged portion is not acceptable.

3. Dispose of damaged portions.

3.7 ATTACHMENTS
A. Concrete Sidewalks: 3000-psi 28-day concrete, 4 inches thick, buff color portland cement, exposed aggregate finish.

END OF SECTION 321623
Division 33
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 331416 - SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Pipe and fittings for Site water line, including potable water, fire water line and irrigation water.

2. Underground pipe markers.

3. Bedding and cover materials.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312000 “Earthwork” for soils and aggregates for backfill in trenches.

1.3 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Pipe and Fittings:

1. Basis of Measurement: Linear foot.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes hand-trimming excavation, pipe and fittings, bedding, connection and tap to building service piping, and connection to existing potable waterlines.

B. Valves:

1. Basis of Measurement: By unit.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes valve, fittings, and accessories.

C. Backflow Preventers:

1. Basis of Measurement: By unit.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes backflow preventer, fittings, and accessories.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

B. Field Quality Control Submittals: Results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations.

B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to City of Redlands Standard Specifications.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Unload, store, and handle site water utility distribution piping according to manufacturer instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: Per ASTM B88. Type K, annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper.

2. Joints: AWS A5.8 (A5.8M) BCuP silver braze.

Encase buried copper tubing in polyethylene encasing wrap. No tears or other damage permitted in the polyethylene encasing wrap. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 80.

3. Fittings: Per ASTM D2466, PVC.

4. Joints: Per ASTM D2855. Solvent weld type.

2.2 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
A. Tapping Sleeves:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.
b. Mueller Co.
c. U.S. Pipe.
d. Furnish materials according to City of Redlands Standard Specifications. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Description: Ductile iron.

1. Working Pressure: 200 psi minimum.

2. Armored End Gaskets: For the full area of the sleeve flanges.

3. Nuts and Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.

4. Type: Dual compression.

5. Outlet Flange Dimensions and Drilling: Per ASME B16.1, Class 125 and MSS SP-60.

C. Tapping Valves: Per AWWA C500.

1. Furnish materials according to City of Redlands Standard Specifications standards.

2.3 HYDRANTS
A. Hydrants: According to City of Redlands Standard Specifications requirements.

2.4 REDUCED-PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Manufacturers:

B. Per ASSE 1013. Diaphragm type, differential pressure relief, located between two check valves.

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Bronze.

3. Springs: Stainless steel.

C. Check Valves: Independently operating, spring-loaded.

1. Provide third check valve opening under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure.

2. Vent Outlet: Non-threaded.

D. Provide two gate valves, one strainer, and four test cocks.

E. Double Check Valve Assemblies: Per ASSE 1012. Two independently operating check valves, with intermediate atmospheric vent.

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant.

3. Springs: Stainless steel.

2.5 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS
A. Plastic Ribbon Tape: Brightly colored, continuously printed. 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick or larger.

1. Manufactured for direct burial service.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 4
100% Design Submittal
B. Trace Wire: Electronic detection materials for nonconductive piping products.

1. Unshielded, 10 gage, THWN-insulated copper wire.

2. Conductive tape.

2.6 MATERIALS
A. Bedding and Cover:

1. Bedding: Fill, as specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork” and as shown on the Drawings.

2. Cover: Fill as specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork” and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade:

1. Soil: as specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork” and as shown on the Drawings.

2. Subsoil: No rocks over 6 inches in diameter, frozen earth, or foreign matter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that building service connections and municipal utility water main sizes, locations, and elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Protect and support existing distribution piping and appurtenances as Work progresses.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Bedding:

1. Excavate pipe trench as specified in Section 312000 and as shown on the Drawings.

2. Place bedding material at trench bottom.

3. Level fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inch compacted depth.

4. Compact per Section 312000 “Earthwork.”

5. Backfill: Place fill materials as specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork” and as shown on the Drawings.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Piping:

1. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping according to City of Redlands Standard Specifications.

2. Group piping with other Site piping work whenever practical.

3. Install pipe to elevations indicated on Drawings.

4. Install ductile iron piping and fittings: in accordance with requirements of the manufacturer and according to AWWA C600 or as otherwise provided herein.

5. Install PVC piping and fittings in accordance with requirements of the manufacturer and according to AWWA C605 or as otherwise provided herein.

6. As soon as the excavation is complete to normal grade of the bottom of the trench:
a. Place, compact and grade bedding to provide firm, uniform and continuous support for the pipe.
b. Excavate bell holes so that only the barrel of the pipe bears upon the bedding.

Blocking under the pipe will not be permitted.
c. Place bedding evenly on each side of the pipe to mid-diameter and use hand tools to force the bedding under the haunches of the pipe and into the bell holes d. Place bedding to 12 inches above the top of the pipe. e. Place backfill above the bedding; placing the initial 3 feet of backfill above the bedding in 1-foot compacted layers.
f. Do not operate directly over the pipe until sufficient backfill has been placed to ensure that such compaction equipment will not have a damaging effect on the pipe.

7. Close ends of the pipe with watertight plugs when installation is not in progress. Prevent deflection, using joints or fittings as required when crossing other utilities.

8. Cut pipes by machine only, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe.

Bevel pipe to conform to bevels.

9. Check pipe to ensure proper connection with adjoining pipe. Match inverts and grade.

10. Do not drive pipe to grade with excessive force that could damage the pipe. Take all steps to prevent from floating in the trench.

11. When moveable trench bracing such as trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates are used to support the sides of the trench, prevent moving the boxes or supporting bracing to prevent movement of the pipe, or disturbance of the pipe bedding and the backfill.

12. Do not extend trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates to extend below top of the pipe.

13. Repair or replace defective pipe.

C. Joints:

1. For push-on type PVC pipe:
a. Lay pipe with bell ends looking ahead.
b. Insert a rubber gasket in the groove of the bell end of the pipe and clean and lubricate joint surfaces.
c. Inset the plain end in alignment with the bell and pushed into place. d. Check that the reference mark on the spigot end is flush with the end of the bell. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 6
100% Design Submittal

2. Mechanical joints at valves, fittings, hydrants, and where designated in accordance with the AWWA C111 and the instructions of the manufacturer. Suitable PVC to cast iron adaptors installed prior to installing fittings. PVC beveled spigot cut flush prior to insertion in mechanical joint pipe. To assemble the joints in the field, thoroughly clean the joint surfaces and rubber gasket with soapy water before tightening the bolts. Tighten bolts to the specified torques. Under no condition use extension wrenches or pipe over handle of ordinary ratchet wrench to secure greater leverage.

3. Route pipe in straight line.

4. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed per City of Redlands Standards.

5. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 feet of cover.

D. Pipe Markers: Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe.

E. Coordinate with trench Work according to City of Redlands General Permit Conditions and Trench Specifications.

F. Valves and Appurtenances:

1. Clean and disinfect valves and appurtenances prior to installation in accordance with City of Redlands Water Systems Standard Specifications.

2. Utilize same procedures as specified under applicable type connecting pipe joint and valves.

3. Verify torquing requirements with the manufacturer.

4. Valves 3-in. in diameter or less: Rotate valve operators and indicators to display toward normal operation locations.

5. Center floor boxes, valve boxes, extension stems, and low floor stands and install vertically centered over operating nut, with couplings as required and elevation of box top adjusted to conform to elevation of finished floor surface or grade.

G. Pipe Sleeves: Install 18-gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve surrounding service main to 6 inches above floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for 2 inches minimum of glass fiber insulation stuffing.

H. Disinfection Procedure: Flush and disinfect system as specified in City of Redlands Water Systems Standard Specifications.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Install pipe within tolerance of 5/8 inch.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pressure Test System According to AWWA C600 and following:

1. Test Pressure: 150 psig or 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure, whichever is greater.

2. Conduct hydrostatic test for at least two hours.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 7
100% Design Submittal

3. Slowly fill with water section to be tested and expel air from piping by installing corporation cocks at high points.

4. Close air vents and corporation cocks after air is expelled and raise pressure to specified test pressure.

5. Observe joints, fittings, and valves under test. Remove and renew cracked pipes, joints, fittings, and valves showing visible leakage and retest.

6. Correct visible deficiencies and continue testing at same test pressure for additional two hours to determine leakage rate.

7. Maintain pressure within plus or minus 5 psi of test pressure.

8. Leakage is defined as quantity of water supplied to piping necessary to maintain test pressure during period of test.

9. Compute maximum allowable leakage using the following formula: L = SD x sqrt(P)/C.

When pipe under test contains sections of various diameters, calculate allowable leakage from sum of computed leakage for each size.
a. L: Testing allowance, in gph
b. S: Length of pipe tested, in feet
c. D: Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches
d. P: Average test pressure during hydrostatic test, in psig e. C: 148,000

10. When test of pipe indicates leakage greater than allowed, locate source of leakage, make corrections, and retest until leakage is within allowable limits.

11. Correct visible leaks regardless of quantity of leakage.

B. Compaction Testing for Bedding: Comply with ASTM D1557.

C. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest.

D. Frequency of Compaction Tests: maximum of 250 feet intervals, no less than two per pipe reach installed.

END OF SECTION 331416
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 331416 - 8
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 333100 - 1
100% Design Submittal
SECTION 333100 - SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Sanitary sewerage gravity piping.

2. Pipe markers.

3. Bedding and cover materials.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312000 “Earthwork” for soils for backfill in trenches.

2. Section 312333 “Trenching and Backfilling” for backfill in trenches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside, and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations.

1.4 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Pipe and Fittings:

1. Basis of Measurement: By linear feet.

2. Basis of Payment: Includes hand trimming, excavation, bedding, pipe and fittings, and connection to building service piping and to onsite sewer and backfilling.

B. Installation, quality control testing, startup, and restoration included in the measurement and payment items listed above.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to onsite sewer, and trenching.

B. Notify City and Plant staff at least 72 hours prior to construction. ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 333100 - 2
100% Design Submittal

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer catalog cuts and other information indicating proposed materials to be used, accessories, details, and construction information.

B. Shop Drawings: Showing layout and details of pipe, reinforcement, joints, gaskets, connector pipe to the new sewer manhole and existing VCP, special fittings and the name of the pipe manufacturer. A schedule of pipe lengths (including the length of individual pipes by diameter) for the entire job.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

B. Manufacturer Instructions: Special procedures required to install specified products.

C. Prior to each shipment of pipe, submit certified test reports that the pipe for this Contract was manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASTM Standards specified herein.

D. Submit information on quality control testing including dimensional drawings of any mandrels or other ovality testing equipment.

E. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

F. Documentation the fine and coarse aggregates used in manufacture of concrete pipe comply with specifications.

1. Documentation no more than 6 months old.

2. Source of the aggregates and the date of the analysis.

G. Results of the compressive strength tests to the Engineer.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record locations of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations.

B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work according to City of Redlands standards.

1.10 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 333100 - 3
100% Design Submittal
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer’s original packaging and inspect for damage.

B. Storage: Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

C. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas.

2. Block individual and stockpiled pipe lengths to prevent moving.

3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

4. Protect materials from weather and UV exposure.

1.12 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

2. Field verify fit-up to existing infrastructure prior to fabrication.

3. Confirm size, depth and orientation of existing VCP sewer pipes entering/exit the new sewer manhole.

4. Document field measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWERAGE PIPING
A. Vitrified Clay Pipe per ASTM C700.

1. Nominal Diameter: 6 inches.

2. End Connections: Bell and spigot style, with compression joints.

3. Fittings: VCP.

4. Joints: Polyester or polyurethane compression joints per ASTM C425.

B. Plastic Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per ASTM D3034, SDR-35.

1. Inside Nominal Diameter: 6 inches ).

2. End Connections: Bell and spigot style, with rubber-ring-sealed gasket joint.

3. Fittings: PVC.

4. Joints: Elastomeric gaskets per ASTM F477.
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 333100 - 4
100% Design Submittal

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Bedding and Cover:

1. Bedding: Fill as specified in Section 312000 “ Earthwork” and as shown on the Drawings.

2. Cover: Fill as specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork” and as shown on the Drawings.

3. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade:
a. Soil as specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork” and as shown on the Drawings. b. Subsoil with no rocks over 6 inches in diameter, frozen earth, or foreign matter.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Pipe Markers: As required by City of Redland Standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive Work.

B. Verify that excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Type of correcting materials (fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, or lean concrete) depends on type of subsoil, percolation characteristics, and compaction requirements.

B. Correct over-excavation with fine aggregate.

C. Remove large stones or other hard materials that could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

D. Protect and support existing sewer lines, utilities, and appurtenances.

E. Utilities:

1. Maintain profiles of utilities.

2. Coordinate with City and Plant Staff to eliminate interference.

3. Notify Engineer if crossing conflicts occur with sewer crossing above existing water pipes, or with less than 12” vertical separation between the new sewer and water pipes.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Install Work according to City of Redlands Standards ©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 333100 - 5
100% Design Submittal
B. Piping:

1. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories according to ASTM C12 and seal joints watertight.

2. Verify that drainage system is shown on Drawings or will be included on Shop Drawings.

Drawing details should describe location of aggregate types in relation to pipe and pipe bedding, dimensions of cut trench width, and details of connections to other Work.

3. Lay pipe to slope gradients as indicated on Drawings.

4. Maximum Variation from Indicated Slope: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Install pipe with a negative / downward oriented slope unless explicitly stated in the Drawings.

5. Install bedding at sides and over top of pipe, to minimum compacted thickness of 6 inch.

6. Backfill and compact as specified in Section 312000 “Earthwork.”

7. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

8. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and onsite sewer system as indicated on the Drawings.

9. Pipe Markers: As specified in City of Redlands Standards.

10. Install Site sanitary sewage system piping to within 5 feet of building, and connect to building sanitary waste system.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Request inspection by Owner’s Representative prior to and immediately after placing bedding.

B. Testing: If tests indicate that Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest.

1. Perform testing on Site sanitary sewage system according to City of Redlands Standards.

3.5 3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

END OF SECTION 333100
©2025 CDM Smith 251643-298407
All Rights Reserved May 2025
Redlands Joint Utilities LAB Building Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping Renovation & Expansion Final Design 333100 - 6
100% Design Submittal
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

APPENDIX

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APPENDIX B

CITY OF REDLANDS

WORKDAY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CITY OF REDLANDS
MUNICIPAL UTILITIES AND ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 2025 APPENDIX B

CONSTRUCTION WORKDAY CALENDAR

JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 4 1 1
1 2 3 4 32 60
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 67 69 70 71 72 73 74 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 26 27 28 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 27 28 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30 31 54 55 56 57 58 59 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 30 31
89 90

APRIL MAY JUNE

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
91 92 93 94 95 121 122 123 152 153 154 155 156 157 158
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 27 28 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30
117 118 119 120 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 180 181

JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
182 183 184 185 186 213 214 244 245 246 247 248 249
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 28 29 30
208 209 210 211 212 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 271 272 273 31 243

OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
274 275 276 277 305 335 336 337 338 339 340
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
278 279 280 281 282 283 284 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 26 27 28 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 28 29 30 31
299 300 301 302 303 304 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 362 363 364 365 30 334
City Holiday
Closed

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CITY OF REDLANDS
MUNICIPAL UTILITIES AND ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 2026 APPENDIX B

CONSTRUCTION WORKDAY CALENDAR

JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30 31
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 88 89 90

APRIL MAY JUNE

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
91 92 93 94 121 122 152 153 154 155 156 157
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 26 27 28 29 30 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 28 29 30
116 117 118 119 120 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 179 180 181 31 151

JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 5
182 183 184 185 213 244 245 246 247 248
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
186 187 188 189 190 191 192 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 26 27 28 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 30
207 208 209 210 211 212 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 270 271 272 273 30 31
242 243

OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER

S M T W T F S S M T W T F S S M T W T F S
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5
274 275 276 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 335 336 337 338 339 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
277 278 279 280 281 282 283 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30 27 28 29 30 31
298 299 300 301 302 303 304 333 334 361 362 363 364 365 City Holiday
Closed

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APPENDIX C

PERMITS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
…
…
.

YES NO
.
…
…
…
.

YES NO
YES NO
Application for Road / Encroachment Permit
City of Redlands - Municipal Utilities & Engineering Department Name: Phone:

Address: City: Zip:

Contractor: USA ID No.:

Contractor License No.: Type: Cal OSHA No.:

I hereby request permission to construct/install improvements/facilities within the City of Redlands road right-of-way at the following location:

Construction Start Date: Anticipated Completion Date:

Development No.: Plan No.:

Street Name:

Cross Streets:

Address:
and for the purpose of performing the following work:

Applicant/Agent Signature: Date:

In accordance with Plans approved by the Municipal Utilities & Engineering Director and/or the Standard Specifications and Detail Drawings of the City of Redlands for the quantity and type of improvements listed below:

SHADED AREA FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
EA Driveway Appr, Res/Comm……………… $ 49.00 / EA =$ Truck Route Permit Required:

SF Sidewalk…………………………………… $ 0.09 / SF =$ YES NO
SF Cross Gutter/Spandrel…………………… $ 0.58 / SF =$
LF Curb & Gutter…………………………… $ 2.19 / LF =$ Closure Permit With LF Curb/Berm………………………………… $ 2.62 / LF =$ Traffic Plan Required:

SF Asphalt Pavement…………………………$ 0.04 / SF =$
SF Crushed Aggregate Base……………… $ 0.04 / SF =$
EA Street Light…………………………………$ 81.00 / EA =$ Water Shutdown Required:

EA Traffic Signal - New………………………. $ 2,152.00 / EA =$
EA Traffic Signal - Modification………………$ 1,737.00 / EA =$ CY Reinforced Concrete…………………… $ 89.00 / CY =$ Bond Required:

LF Storm Drain Pipe…………………………. $ 8.00 / LF =$
EA Curb Inlet/Outlet Structures………………$ 67.00 / EA =$
EA Storm Drain Manhole/Junction Box…….. $ 67.00 / EA =$ EA Curb Core…………………………………. $ 62.00 / EA =$
LF Sewer Main……………………..………… $ 0.95 / LF =$
EA Sewer Manhole…………………..………. $ 67.00 / EA =$ Conduit Material:

EA Sewer Cleanout……………………………$ 134.00 / EA =$
EA Sewer Lateral…………………………… $ 67.00 / EA =$
LF Water Main - Potable…………………….. $ 1.09 / LF =$ Conduit Size:

LF Water Main - Non-Potable……...……….. $ 1.09 / LF =$
EA Fire Hydrant Assembly……………………$ 66.00 / EA =$
EA Water Service Lateral……………………. $ 26.00 / EA =$
EA Water Shutdown………………………….. $ 67.00 / EA =$
EA Fire Service……………………………… $ 58.00 / EA =$
LF Excavation/Utility Trench………..….…….$ 1.25 / LF =$
SF Street Patch……………………………….. $ 0.67 / SF =$
SF Warranty Fee (Street Cut)……………..…$ / SF =$
$ / =$ Calculated By
$ / =$
SUBTOTAL PERMIT FEE $
PERMIT FEE work complete within specified date from issuance = Inspected by $ 219.00 fee. $219.00
Municipal Utilities & Engineering
PENALTY FEE 25% of total permit fee if issued after commencement of work $ ($250.00 minimum fee)
(Effective 06/02/09) TOTAL ENCROACHMENT PERMIT FEE $ Approved By

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APPENDIX D
Contractor Safety Program

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CONTRACTOR

SAFETY PROGRAM
Rev. July 2024

TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. POLICY......................................................................................................................3 II. AUTHORITY..............................................................................................................3 III. SCOPE.....................................................................................................................3 IV. DEFINITIONS...........................................................................................................3 V. RESPONSIBILITIES ....................................................................................................4 RISK MANAGEMENT ..............................................................................................................................................4 PROJECT MANAGER (CITY) ..........................................................................................................5 INSPECTOR (CITY) .....................................................................................................................5 EMPLOYEES (CITY) ....................................................................................................................5 CONTRACTOR.........................................................................................................................................................5 PROJECT SAFETY OFFICIAL .....................................................................................................................................6 VI. PROGRAM ..............................................................................................................6 SAFETY PREQUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE...................................................................................................... 6 APPEAL PROCESS....................................................................................................................................................7 CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (TIER I AND TIER II)................................................................................ 8 INSPECTIONS..........................................................................................................................................................9 TRAINING/DOCUMENTATION ...............................................................................................................................9 NON-COMPLIANCE ................................................................................................................................................9 CITY PERSONNEL..................................................................................................................................................... 9 VII. RECORDKEEPING ................................................................................................. 10 VIII. ADDITIONAL REFERENCES ...................................................................................10 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT (A) ...........................................................................................11 SAFETY PREQUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE (B)............................................................................12 NOTICE OF NONCOMPLIANCE (C) ...............................................................................................13 JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (D) ........................................................................................................14 INCIDENT INVESTIGATION FORM (E) ............................................................................................ 15 3 I. Policy
The purpose of this Contractor Safety Program (“CSP”) is to ensure, as best as reasonably possible, the protection and safety of all persons and property during construction activities undertaken by private contractors on behalf of the City of Redlands (“City”). The City has a comprehensive and structured approach in outsourcing services performed on City facilities by third-party persons and entities (“Contractor(s)”). The first phase of this comprehensive approach includes actively screening Contractors based on safety records, safety performance, and safety compliance. After the qualified Contractor is awarded a contract, the Contractor must then ensure compliance with all local, state, federal and Cal/OSHA regulations applicable to the contracted scope of work, and requirements set forth within this CSP. The Contractor, its agents, and personnel must adhere to the policies and procedures set forth by this CSP and all applicable laws and regulations.

II. Authority
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 336.10 “Determination of Citable Employer” California Code of Regulations, Title 8
“Greenbook” Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Redlands Municipal Code
California Building Code
III. Scope
This CSP applies to all Contractors who provide or render construction or improvement services for Cityowned property and facilities.

The Contractor services covered under this CSP include, but are not limited to, the following:

A. New construction;
B. Remodeling;
C. Facility maintenance orrepair;
D. Equipment installation or maintenance; and
E. Services (i.e. janitorial, fleet operations, landscaping,etc.) Consultants/ Professional service providers are exempt from having to submit a Safety Prequalification Questionnaire (“SPQ”), prior to the beginning of work, but they are expected to be compliant with industry best practices with regards to maintaining a safe work environment for their employees andothers.

IV. Definitions
A. Contract – any written agreement between the City of Redlands and a Contractor, to perform a specified scope of work on City facilities. With respect to this policy, a contract includes, but is not limited to: awarded purchase orders, bids, and/ or projectcontracts.

B. Construction Work – construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting anddecorating.

C. Contractor – a person or entity (including all personnel) awarded a contract to perform work on City property or facilities.

D. D.A.R.T Rate – Injuries and illnesses severe enough to warrant: Days Away, Restrictions and Transfers. The DART rate is calculated using the following formula: Number of OSHA Recordable injuries and illnessesthatresulted in Days Away x 200,000/divided by total hours worked by all employees during the year covered.
4 E. Designated Work Area – an area where it is necessary to restrict or limit entry or access of nonessential personnel or the public. Examples include work areas involving remediation abatement, demolition, excavation, and overheadlifting.

F. Facilities – any building or property owned by the City ofRedlands.

G. Hazard – source or situation with a potential for harm in terms of injury or health, damage to property, damage to workplace environment, or a combination ofthese.

H. Job Hazard Analysis (“JHA”) – a technique that focuses on job tasks as a way to identify hazards before they occur. It focuses on the relationship between the worker, the task, the tools, and the work environment. The objective is to eliminate the risk or to utilize control measures to reduce the risk.

I. North American Industry Classification System (“NAICS”) – is the standard used by Federal statistical agencies in classifying business establishments for the purpose of collecting, analyzing, and publishing statistical data related to the U.S. businesseconomy.

J. Non-compliance – any deviation from standards, practices, processes, procedures, regulations etc. that could either directly or indirectly lead to injury or illness, property damage, damage to the workplace environment, or any combination of thesecriteria.

K. Notice of non-compliance – form provided to the Contractor by the City alerting the contractor of non-compliance with City specifications, Cal/OSHA regulations, or any other generally accepted safe work practice.

L. Non-compliant hazardous work condition – any hazard that is considered to be non-compliant with State or Federal safety and health regulations, City specifications, or any inconsistency with generally accepted work practices.

M. Personnel – all Contractor employees, contractors, sub-contractors and agents providedaccess to City property or facilities.

N. Recordable Incident – any injury or illness resulting in death, days away from work, restricted work or transfer to another job, medical treatment beyond first aid, or loss of consciousness per OSHA Section 1904.7(a).

O. Safety Tailgate – informalsafety meeting generally conducted at the job site prior to the commencement of a job or work shift.

P. Services – any and all, labor, duties, functions and activities required to be performed by the Contractor under the contract and any subsequentaddenda.

V. Responsibilities

RISK MANAGEMENT
A. Update, maintain, and administer thisCSP;
B. Maintain centralized records of training, site visit data, written programs, tailgate meetings, permits, and all other necessary contractor relateddocumentation;
C. Provide technical assistance to Engineeringpersonnel; D. Attend Pre-construction meetings and progress meetings asneeded; E. Provide assistance on safety inspections as needed;
F. Review safety submittals;
G. Provide guidance on pre-qualification determination;and H. Provide training to affected city personnel with responsibilities under thisprogram. 5 PROJECT MANAGER (CITY)
The Project Manager has the authority to delegate any or all portions of this CSP to subordinates, but the Project Manager will be held accountable for their compliance. The Project Manager shall contact Risk Management, as necessary, for assistance in relation to this CSP.

A. Ensure safety hazards are addressed in a timelymanner; B. Communicate safety concerns during pre-construction meetings and progressmeetings; C. Inform impacted employees of construction activities scheduled in their workarea; D. Enforce pre-qualification procedures in bidding process;and E. Ensure this CSP is properly executed.

INSPECTOR (CITY)
The City of Redlands construction inspector is not a safety professional and will only provide “Notice of NonCompliance” for obvious and serious non-compliant conditions.

A. To the best of their abilities, inspect work sites for safetyhazards; B. Communicate safety concerns to Contractor;
C. Provide Contractor with “Notice of Non-Compliance” when serious conditions occur or repeat violations; D. Collect documentation needed for constructionworksites; E. Submit documentation to Risk Management forrecordkeeping; F. Maintain photo documentation of safety hazards;
G. Never enter situations that can harm or endanger himself/herself; H. Never use personal protective equipment (PPE) or enter situations, which they are not trained for; I. Contact Emergency Medical Services (911) and Risk Management in case of emergency;and J. Attend and communicate safety concerns in progressmeetings.

EMPLOYEES (CITY)
A. Immediately notify the Project Manager, inspector, or Risk Management of any safety related concerns at a Contractor job site; and
B. Contact Emergency Medical Services (911) and Risk Management in case of emergency.

CONTRACTOR
Where relevant and applicable, the Contractor’s responsibilities shall include:

A. Compliance with requirements and responsibilities detailed within the Contractor Safety Program; B. Ensure all local regulatory requirements are met and all necessary permits are obtained before conducting work on behalf of theCity;
C. Designate a Project Safety Official by name who shall always be available to abate safety hazards; D. Ensure all personnel have the appropriate qualifications and training to perform the contracted work (Copies of current training documentation and certifications must be on file with theCity); E. Inform City Project Manager or inspector of any job site safety hazards or concerns; F. Inform City Project Manager if any suspected asbestos-containing material is located; G. Conduct and submit Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) before work and as required by change of tasks; H. Conduct and submit Safety Tailgates on a bi-weeklybasis; I. Provide all required PPE necessary to conduct work safely and in accordance with required local regulations;
J. The safety of all individuals who enter worksite;
K. Spill cleanup;
L. Immediately report any incidents, accidents, near misses, unsafe conditions, or unsafe acts involving any jobsite personnel;
6 M. Arrange for the properstorage and removal of waste generated prior to the completion of job, and provide confirmation that the materials have been removed or disposed of in a manner compliant with all applicable environmentalregulations;
N. Removing all equipment used during work activities and ensuring proper housekeeping of designated work area at the end of each workday and upon completion of thejob; O. Contact Emergency Services (911) and Project Manager in the event of an emergency; and P. For the actions of their subcontractors, as they may pertain to this CSP, including their adherence to its contents and review of this document.

PROJECT SAFETY OFFICIAL (CONTRACTOR)
A. Shall always be at the work site;
B. Must be thoroughly familiar with the Contractor’s Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) and Code of Safe Practices;
C. Shall always be available to abate any potential safety hazards;and D. Shall have the authority and responsibility to shut down an unsafe operation, if necessary.

VI. Program

SAFETY PREQUALIFICATION PROCESS
A. The safety prequalification process is intendedto:
• Provide the City with knowledge of past and current safety performance of Contractors working on City construction projects;
• Improve Contractor compliance with City safety rules, including safe work practices required by applicable regulations and laws; and
• Improve safety during Contractor activities.

B. A copy of the SPQ shall be provided to each person or entity bidding on a project, as part of the bidding process.

C. The completed questionnaire shall be returned and reviewed prior to awarding contract work, with supporting information provided as indicated by responses on the questionnaire.

D. The SPQ shall be submitted to 35 Cajon St., Suite 4
Redlands Ca, 92373
Attention: Project Name-Contractor Name-SPQ
E. The following criteria and information relating to the Contractor will be reviewed prior to awarding contract:
• Contractor License;
• Incident Rates;
• OSHA Citations;
• Safety Policies;
• Safety Programs and Procedures;
• Compliance History on City Projects; and
• Certification Statement.

F. Contractor must qualify in each section to be approved for the award of a contract.

G. If a Contractor failsto pass prequalification procedure, the City has the right to disqualify the Contractor’s proposal.
7 H. All costs associated with compliance with City of Redlands prequalification requirements shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor.

I. If a Contractor provides information that is later determined to be false, or improperly withholds information, the Contractor will be immediately disqualified.

J. Any questions or information relating to filing this questionnaire may be answered by reaching:
• Engineering: (909) 798-7698; or
• Risk Management: (909) 798-7514

DISQUALIFICATION APPEAL PROCESS
This provision is established pursuant to Public Contract Code section 20101(d) which requires every public agency that requires prospective biddersto prequalify pursuant to the law to establish “a processthat will allow prospective biddersto dispute their proposed prequalification rating prior to selection of an alternate bidder.” If the City intends to disqualify a bidder based upon the bidder’s safety record, the City will notify the bidder in writing and provide the bidder with any supporting evidence that has been received from others or adduced because of an investigation by the City. The notice of intention shall be sent by certified mail with return receipt requested or by overnight mail via a delivery service that provides online tracking which identifies the date of the prospective bidder’s receipt of the notice, and shall include notice that the bidder has the right to, and may request a hearing to rebut any evidence used as a basis for disqualification and to present evidence to the City as to why the prospective bidder should be found qualified. Requests for a hearing must be made by written request to the City within ten calendar days ofthe date of the prospective bidder’s receipt of the City’s notice of intention. If the bidder does not request a hearing within the time allowed, the City’s determination shall stand unchallenged and become final.

Within seven calendar days of receiving the bidder’s request for a hearing, the City shall notify the bidder in writing of the date, time and place of the hearing. The hearing shall be held no sooner than ten (10) calendar days and no later than fifteen (15) calendar days afterthe notice is given. The notice shall inform the bidder of itsright to present testimony and documents in support of its position.

The hearing shall be conducted before the Redlands City Manager, which may be continued from time to time as reasonably determined by the City Manager but shall not exceed forty five (45) days. At the conclusion of the hearing, and after considering all testimony and documentation presented, the City Manager shall issue a written decision no later than five calendar days following the hearing. The City Manager’s decision shall be final and is not subject to further appeal to the City.

The bidder shall not be entitled to bid on any contracts with the City until it has met the safety pre-qualification standards. If the City Manager approves an appeal, the contractor will have been deemed to meet the qualification standards and it will be valid for one year. The bidder shall have the right to withdraw its application for prequalification or its appeal at any time before the City Manager’s decision becomes final. Such withdrawal will not preclude the bidder from re-applying for prequalification.

CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
A. After a contract is awarded, the Contractor shall maintain, throughout the duration of the project, safety measures as necessary to protect the public and workers within, or in the vicinity of, the designated work zone. This includes an evaluation of the work to be performed and the hazards likely to be encountered.

Contractors are expected to follow, at a minimum, all pertinent laws, rules, and regulations for the location in which they will be working. Where applicable, Contractor Safety Programs will meet or exceed City programs/ procedures and are subject to review and approval by the City prior to contract execution.

B. Job Hazard Analysis(“JHA”)

1. Prior to a notice to proceed a JHA must be completed utilizing the City’s form, or equivalent, to assess the hazards present in the designated work area. Any information requested on the City’s form, but not stated on the equivalent form utilized, shall be provided separately with the original submission.

2. All members of the construction unit must sign the JHA to acknowledge hazard abatement procedures.

3. JHA must be kept at job site accessible to all impactedpersonnel.

4. Failure to follow JHA procedures may lead to termination of the contract.

C. Personal Protective Equipment(“PPE”)

1. All required PPE must be always worn during workactivities.

2. All mandatory PPE must be highlighted in theJHA.

3. The Contractor shall provide PPE.

4. Failure to follow PPE guidelines may lead to termination of the contract.

D. Safety Tailgates

1. Safety Tailgate Meetings must be held on a biweekly basis for all constructionprojects.

2. The first meeting shall take place on Day 1, Week 1 and every other week thereafter.

3. Tailgates shall be signed by all personnel and submitted to Construction Inspector for recordkeeping.

4. Tailgate topics should be specific to the scope of work of theproject.

E. Injury Reporting

1. Contractors shall immediately report injuries or accidents to the Project Manager (regardless of severity). Additionally, contractors are responsible for and must also conduct accident investigations of any injuries that occur on site and provide results to the Project Manager.

2. Use the City Incident Investigation Form (Attachment E), or equivalent, to meet thisrequirement.

F. Spill Prevention

1. The Contractor is responsible for any spill within the confines of the project and those outside of the construction limits caused by the Contractor’s defective equipment, containers, or personnel.

2. Secondary spill containment systems shall be used to prevent contamination of the environment.

G. Construction in OccupiedBuildings

1. When building occupants are present during construction projects additional safeguards must be implemented to eliminate exposures and complaints. Dust/ particulates from demolition, sanding and other construction activities must be controlled by adequate ventilation, or containment and negative air ventilation systems based upon the specific type of activity and particle. Similar controls must be utilized for odorous activities including, but not limited to, carpet adhesive, painting, welding, and coatings.

2. The Contractor shall ensure that the HVAC system is protected to prevent contamination. If an HVAC system is unprotected and contaminated by any construction/demolition materials, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the cost of cleaning the system and any subsequent repairs therein.

3. Negative air ventilation systems shall have appropriate filtration and be exhausted outside of the building.

INSPECTIONS
A. Follow-up inspections will be executed to enforce compliance with safety and health requirements.

B. Follow-up inspections will be conducted as part of routine site inspections by construction inspector and Risk Management employees.

C. The SPQ aims to provide the City with knowledge of Contractor safety history and safety practices. This minimizes the need for an increased frequency of inspections. In addition, the City will take the following guidelines into consideration when determining the frequency of inspections.

1. Scale of project;

2. The frequency with which the number and types of hazards change as the work progresses;

3. More frequent inspections will be implemented in the beginning of the project;and

4. When the Contractor has never worked for theCity.

TRAINING/DOCUMENTATION
A. The contractor will ensure that all personnel are trained for the scope of work they are assigned, as well as the equipment they will beutilizing.

B. Documentation shall be on file with the City prior to projectstart.

C. Personnel missing training documentation shall not be permitted to work on awarded City projects.

D. Training requirements are mandated by Federal and State Regulations. This may include, but is not limited to, the programs listed in the SPQ.

NON-COMPLIANCE
A. Contractor compliance issues shall be documented on the “Notice of Non-Compliance” form. A copy of this form shall be provided to the Contractor for completion.

B. Upon receipt of the completed “Notice of Non-Compliance” form, the Project Manager and Risk Management will evaluate, based on the incident, and identify, as appropriate, any additional corrective and/or preventive actions for completion.

C. If immediate correction is not feasible, the project will be temporarily stopped until the issue is adequately resolved.

D. City staff with authority to stop work are:

1. Construction Inspector;

2. City Project Manager;

3. City Manager; and

4. Risk Management staff.

E. Any violation or deviation from safety rules, procedures, or regulations, based on evaluation, may be subject to all disciplinary actions listed asfollows:

1. Verbal warning

2. Written warning-Notice ofNon-Compliance (work may not continue until approved corrections are implemented);

3. Dismissal of non-complying personnel; and/or

4. Termination of Contract.

The City of Redlands maintains the right to terminate any contract for the violation of safety issues without liability to the City.

CITY PERSONNEL
A. All affected City employees will be informed in advance of any construction related work or other contract work which has the potential for impacting their workplace. Notifications will be made to all affected employees via e-mail or written memo by the Project Manager or designee. Notifications must include the following information:

1. Start and end dates of the work to becompleted;

2. Work areas to be affected;

3. Description of work to be completed;

4. Name and phone number of Project Manager;

5. Name and phone number of Construction Inspector; and

6. Name and phone number of Risk Management.

B. Employees should be instructed to notify the Project Manager regarding logistical issues or other concerns. Safety and Health concerns should be directed to either the Project Manager, Inspector, or Safety Specialist.

VII. Recordkeeping
The City’s Human Resources / Risk Management Department will maintain all records prepared in association with this CSP, with copies also place on file with the office of the City Clerk.

VIII. Additional References
https://www.dir.ca.gov/title8/336_10.html
Attachment A
11 City of Redlands
Acknowledgment of Receipt Statement
I acknowledge by signing this document, that I have received and reviewed the City of Redlands’ Contractor Safety Program and understand that it contains valuable information on the City’s policies and procedures regarding employee safety as it pertains to Contractor activities. Furthermore, I acknowledge that failure to comply with any of these procedures may lead to termination of the contract with the City.

Contractor Signature Contractor Title:

Contractor Name (Print) Date Signed
If you have any questions regarding this document, please contact the Risk Management Division at (909) 798-7514.

Attachment B
12 Company Name:

Contractor License #: Expiration Date:

Address:

City: State: Zip Code:

Name of Person Submitting Application:

Title: Telephone #:

Email Address:

Identify the highest-ranking Safety/Health Professional in your Company:

Name:

Title: Telephone #:

CITY OF REDLANDS

SAFETY PREQUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE
Omitting or reporting false information on this questionnaire may result in disqualification of bid.

The City of Redlands reserves the right to conduct random or for-cause audits of information stated in this questionnaire. If deemed necessary, additional documentation may be requested by the City to verify responses on this questionnaire.

SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
13 INCIDENT RATES
Provide your actual injury and illness data below:

Provide the NAICS Code Number that bestrepresents
your Firm:

Provide any additional numbers here:
(Provide three full years of data) Last Calendar 2 Years Ago 3 Years Ago Number of hours worked by all employees:

Total Recordable Incident Rate*:

D.A.R.T. Rate*:

Total Number of Fatalities:

WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INFORMATION

1. Provide your Workers’ Compensation Experience Modification Rate (EMR) Data:

Policy Year EMR
* If your current EMR is greater than 1.25, initialing here certifies that you will provide a competent, full- time person or representative responsible for safety for all City projects:

Current EMR*
*lnitialing here certifies that your firm does not have an EMR:
(Submit a copy of your firm's Loss Run Reports for the last three years if your firm does not have an EMR.)
1 Year Ago:
2 Years Ago: Name of your firm’s Workers’ Compensation carrier:
3 Years Ago: Phone Number of Workers’ Compensation carrier

2. Is your firm self-insured for Workers' Compensation claims? Yes  No  (If yes, please attach a copy of the latest Annual Report to the State of California Department of Industrial Relations and/or State of California Certificate of Self-Insurance.) SECTION 3– CITATION HISTORY

1. Has your firm received any regulatory citations in the last threeyears? Yes  No  If yes, please answer the question below.

SECTION 2 – INCIDENT RATES & WORKER’S COMPENSATION INFORMATION Incident Rate = [(Total Recordable Cases X 200,000 hours)/ Number of hours worked by all employees] D.A.R.T. Rate = [(Total Number of entries for Days Away, Restricted and Job Transfer X 200,000 hours)/ Number of hours worked by all employees]
If your latest incident rates and D.A.R.T. rates are greater than 100% of the industry average for all your NAICS code Numbers Listed, your bid may be disqualified.

The industry average can be found at www.bls.gov
14 2. Were any of the confirmed (Closed) citations classified as Serious, Willful, Repeat, or Failure to abate?
Yes  No 

3. If yes, please explain:

4. Have you abated all the citations issued to you in the last three years Yes  No  If no, please explain abatement action plan:

SECTION 4 – SAFETY POLICIES
Questions (Please check YES or NO) YES NO*

1. Does your company provide and adhere to a written Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) (CCR Title 8 §3203(a))? If yes, a copy of the program will be required on-hand at the job site throughout the duration of the contract. Please attach a copy to your bid proposal.  

2. Does your company provide and conduct Tailgate Meetings or equivalent with employees at least every 10 working days? (CCR Title 8 §1509(e))
 

3. Does your company have a policy for disciplinary action for unsafe behavior ensuring employee compliance with safe and healthy work practices? (CCR Title 8 §3203(a)(2))  

4. Does your company provide and abide by a written Code of Safe Practices that relates to your firm’s operations. (CCR Title 8 §1509(b)) If yes, a copy of the Code of Safe Practices will be required on-hand at the job site throughout the duration of the contract. Please attach a copy with your bid proposal.  

5. Does your company perform JHAs? (CCR Title 8 §1511(b)  

6. Does your company provide training and retraining programs for ensuring employee compliance with safe and healthy work practices? (CCR Title 8 §3203 (a)(2), (a)(7)  

7. Does your company provide training and retraining programs for ensuring employee compliance   *Please provide reason(s) for NO answer in the box below or on a separate sheet of paper.

Failure to provide the above-referenced documents will result in the contractor’s bid being disqualified.

PLEASE ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS BY CHECKING YES OR NO, AND ATTACHING APPROPRIATE DOCUMENTS THAT MAY APPLY OR AS REQUESTED.

SECTION 5 – SAFETY PROGRAMS AND PROCEDURES
15 YES NO

1. Is Confined Space work anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, please proceed to Question 2)  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Confined Space Entry Procedure  
List of personnel authorized on jobsite to work in confined space(s)   List of personnel authorized on jobsite to serve as Rescue Team   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

2. Is work requiring Lockout/Tagout protocols anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, please proceed to Question 3)  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) Procedure  
List of personnel authorized on jobsite to perform LOTO   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

3. Is work requiring a personal lift anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, please proceed to Question 4)  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
List of personnel authorized on jobsite to use lifts   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

4. Is work requiring a forklift anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, please proceed to Question 5)  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
List of personnel authorized on jobsite to use a forklift   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

5. Is work requiring a crane anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, please proceed to Question 6)  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Crane Program  
Copy of all expected Crane operators’ Certifications   List of personnel designated as Competent under Crane program   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)   NOTE: If awarded bid, more documentation may be required 16 6. Is Hot Work (as defined by OSHA) anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, please proceed to Question 7)  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Hot Work Procedure  
List of personnel authorized on jobsite to perform Hot Work   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

7. Is Trenching/ Excavation work anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 8)  
Is a plan in place for the disposal of all material that cannot be returned to the trench/ excavation?   Are appropriate materials for barricading or securing work area at jobsite?   Has a permit from the Department of Industrial Relations for excavations deeper than 5 feet been obtained?  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Trenching/ Excavation Procedure  
Copy of Permit if trench is to exceed depth of 5 feet   List of personnel designated as Competent under Trenching/ Excavation Program   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)   NOTE: If awarded bid, more documentation may be required

8. Is electrical work anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 9)   If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Electrical Safety Program  
List of personnel designated as Competent under Electrical Safety Program   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

9. Is work that may have an arc flash potential anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 10)  
Are all materials required to safely perform arc flash present?   If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of Arc Flash Procedure  
List of personnel designated as Competent under Arc Flash Program   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)   17 10. Is work involving chemicals anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 11)?  
If yes, please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Hearing Conservation Program  
List of personnel working in high noise areas  
Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

11. Is work involving chemicals anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 12)?  
* Copies of SDS for Chemicals used must be kept at jobsite Please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Hazard Communication Program  
List of personnel performing work with chemicals  
Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)   List trade names of all hazardous materials which you will be using on site:

12. Is work on or adjacent to public roadways anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 13)  
Do you have the appropriate provisions (signs, devices, barricades/)   Please attach the following: Attached?
Please provide a list of personnel working in traffic areas.   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)   NOTE: If awarded bid, more documentation may be required

13. Is it anticipated in the scope of the work awarded that exposure to asbestos is possible? (If no, proceed to Question 14)  
Please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written procedure(s)  
List of personnel working with potential exposure to asbestos   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)   18 14. Is it anticipated in the scope of the work awarded that exposure to silica is possible? (i.e. sandblasting, concrete demolition, concrete saw cutting, surface grinding, etc.) (If no, proceed to Question 15)
 
Please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of Silica Control Plan  
List of personnel working with potential exposure to silica   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

15. Is work at heights anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 16)   Please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Fall Protection Program  
List of personnel designated as Competent under Fall Protection Program   Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

16. Is work requiring the use of respirators anticipated in the scope of the work awarded? (If no, proceed to Question 17)  
Please attach the following: Attached?
Copy of written Respiratory Protection Program  
List of personnel using respirators  
Verification of personnel training (copies of certs, cards, etc.)  

17. If the scope of work to be performed is not adequately represented by questions (1-16), please list any additional Health & Safety concerns below.

In addition to the previous sections, Contractors that have previously been awarded work by the City, will be equally evaluated on their compliance history in relation to City projects.

SECTION 6 – COMPLIANCE HISTORY ON CITY PROJECTS
19 I Certify under penalty of perjury that:
a. the information contained herein is true and correct to the best of my knowledge,and b. no attempt has been made to give false or misleading information or to withhold any information.

Signature of Authorized Representative: Title of Authorized Representative Printed Name of Authorized Representative Date Signed:

SECTION 7 – CERTIFICATION STATEMENT
20 Attachment C

NOTICE OF NON-COMPLIANCE
Project:

Contractor:

Notice of Non-Compliance was issued toContractor’s representative, , Name
on at .

The following unsafe behaviors were observed at the Contractor’s job site:

If the unsafe condition is not immediately corrected, the City of Redlands may take disciplinary action in accordance with the Contractor Safety Program guidelines. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ To be completed by Contractor
Corrective action plan to abate hazards:

Unsafe Condition Resolved: Date: Time:

Remarks:
21 Attachment D
Job Hazard Analysis
Project:

Company: Project Safety Official: Project Manager (City):

Scope of Work: Location: Date:

Tasks Potential Safety
Risks/Hazards
Safety
Controls/Mitigate
Required PPE
Hard Hat
Safety Vest
Safety Glasses/Goggles
Safety Boots
Respirator
Safety Gloves
Face Shield
Fall Protection
Other:

Signatures of Employees On-Site this JHA is applicable to:

Employee Signature: Print Name: Date:
22 Attachment E

INCIDENT INVESTIGATION FORM
Date of Incident: Time of Incident: Date Reported:

Lead Investigator: Contact Information:

Contractor: Employee Name:

Witness 1 Name: Telephone:

Witness 2 Name: Telephone:

Incident Site/ Location
Incident Summary:

Near Miss Yes No Incident Severity: Minor Significant Major Critical Root Cause(s):

Corrective Actions:

City Council Meeting J. 5.

DATE: 10/21/2025
TO: Honorable Mayor and City Council Members
SUBJECT: Consideration of a sole source Professional Services Agreement with Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. for engineering design and permitting services for the site integration of an ultra-low emissions flare at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant in an amount not-to-exceed $268,200 (Facilities and Community Services Director Crocker)
MOTION(S):

If the City Council determines that staff’s recommendation is appropriate, the following motion is provided:
"I move that City Council approve the sole source Professional Services Agreement with Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. in an amount not-to-exceed $268,200."

1. RECOMMENDATION:

Staff recommends City Council approve the sole source Professional Services Agreement with Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. for engineering design and permitting services for the site integration of an ultra-low emissions flare at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant in an amount not-to-exceed $268,200.

DISCUSSION:

The Facilities and Community Services Department, Solid Waste Division, operates the California Street Landfill (CSL) and its’ actual day-to-day operations. It is an active Class III landfill regulated by various state entities that permit and monitor the site's daily operations.

The existing landfill gas flare system at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant is over 25 years old and has become challenging to meet current operational and regulatory standards. To ensure compliance and improve efficiency, the City has initiated the procurement process for a new landfill gas blower skid and ultra-low emissions flare. This replacement system will ensure the City remains in full regulatory compliance.

In addition to the flare procurement, it is necessary to have a company provide engineering design and permitting services for the site integration of the ultra-low emissions flare. The project involves highly specialized technical requirements and strict regulatory compliance. Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. (CEC) has been essential in ensuring that the selected flare will be properly integrated and that regulatory compliance will be maintained.

CEC’s role has expanded to include detailed analysis of gas production projections, flare sizing, and establishing the operational parameters necessary to meet the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) permit conditions.

The SCAQMD permit directly influences the City’s selection of the flare provider, and the City chose the John Zink Hamworthy Combustion system to minimize revisions to the approved permit. CEC has been involved in every stage of the permit review, beginning in 2024 when the City received the Permit to Construct a replacement flare from the SCAQMD. They have also been involved in the system design and regulatory coordination, allowing them to possess unique knowledge of the site-specific conditions, permitting requirements, and technical specifications.

Staff has determined that CEC’s continued involvement and approval of the sole source agreement are essential, as they are uniquely qualified to ensure the selected flare is properly integrated, the project stays on schedule, and regulatory compliance is maintained.

ALTERNATIVES:

City Council may elect not to approve the sole source agreement for engineering design and permitting services and provide alternative direction to staff.

STRATEGIC PLAN:

Supports Priority D- Sustainability.

SUBMITTED BY:

Tabitha Crocker, Facilities and Community Services Director RECOMMENDED BY:

Charles M. Duggan Jr., City Manager
REVIEWED BY:

Yvette M. Abich Garcia, City Attorney
Janice McConnell, Assistant City Manager
Christopher Boatman, Assistant City Manager
Danielle Garcia, Management Services/Finance Director
Dana Abramovitz-Daniel, Procurement Manager
PREPARED BY:

Nathalie Ayala, Senior Administrative Assistant
Fiscal Impact
Fiscal Year: FY 2025-26
Revenue Generating: No
Appropriation Required Y/N: N
Amount: $268,200
Budgeted Y/N: Y
Account No.: 511910
Discussion:

Sufficient funding for the purchase order is included in the Solid Waste Division's (511910) project budget for Fiscal Year 2025-26 as approved by City Council.

Attachments
B. Professional Services Agreement
C. Single Sole Source Documents
1 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm

AGREEMENT TO PERFORM PROFESSIONAL SERVICES
This agreement for the provision of engineering design and permitting services for the site integration of an ultra-low emissions flare at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant (“Agreement”) is made and entered in this 21st day of October, 2025 (“Effective Date”), by and between the City of Redlands, a municipal corporation (“City”) and Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. a Pennsylvania corporation (“Consultant”). City and Consultant are sometimes individually referred to herein as a “Party” and, together, as the “Parties.” In consideration of the mutual promises contained herein, City and Consultant agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 – ENGAGEMENT OF CONSULTANT

1.1 City hereby engages the Consultant to provide engineering design and permitting services for the site integration of an ultra low emissions flare at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant services for City (the “Services”).

1.2 The Services shall be performed by the Consultant in a professional manner, and Consultant represents that it has the skill and the professional expertise necessary to provide the Services to City at a level of competency presently maintained by other practicing professional consultants in the industry providing like and similar types of Services.

ARTICLE 2 – SERVICES OF CONSULTANT

2.1 The Services that Consultant shall perform are more particularly described in Exhibit “A,” titled “Scope of Services,” which is attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference.

2.2 Consultant shall comply with applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations in the performance of this Agreement including, but not limited to, any applicable State prevailing wage laws.

ARTICLE 3 – RESPONSIBILITIES OF CITY

3.1 City designates Tabitha Crocker, Facilities and Community Services Director, as City’s representative with respect to performance of the Services, and such person shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, interpret and define City’s policies and decisions with respect to performance of the Services.

ARTICLE 4 – PERFORMANCE OF SERVICES

4.1 Consultant shall perform and complete the Services in a prompt and diligent manner in accordance with the schedule set forth in Exhibit “B,” titled “Project Fee Schedule,” which is attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference. 2 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm

4.2 The term of this Agreement shall be for a period of one (1) year commencing as of the Effective Date, unless terminated earlier as provided herein.

4.3 If Consultant’s Services include deliverable electronic visual presentation materials, such materials shall be delivered in a form, and made available to City, consistent with City Council-adopted policy for the same. It shall be the obligation of the Consultant to obtain a copy of such policy from City staff.

ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENTS TO CONSULTANT

5.1 Total compensation for Consultant’s performance of the Services shall be in the amount of two hundred sixty-eight thousand dollars ($268,200). City shall pay Consultant in accordance with Exhibit “B,” titled “Project Fee Schedule” which is attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference.

5.2 Consultant shall submit monthly invoices to City describing the Services performed during the preceding month. Consultant’s invoices shall include a brief description of the Services performed, the dates the Services were performed, the number of hours spent and by whom, and a description of reimbursable expenses related to the Services. City shall pay Consultant no later than thirty (30) days after receipt and approval by City of Consultant’s invoice.

5.3 Any notice or other communication required, or which may be given, pursuant to this Agreement, shall be in writing. Any such notice shall be deemed delivered (i) on the date of delivery in person; (ii) five (5) days after deposit in first class registered mail, with return receipt requested; (iii) on the actual delivery date if deposited with an overnight courier; or (iv) on the date sent by facsimile or electronic mail transmission (including PDF), if confirmed with a copy sent contemporaneously by first class, certified, registered or express mail; in each case properly posted and fully prepaid to the appropriate address set forth below, or such other address as a Party may provide notice in accordance with this section:

CITY: CONSULTANT:

City Clerk Benjamin Arata, Principal
City of Redlands Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. 35 Cajon Street 2356 Gold Meadow Way, Suite 120
P.O. Box 3005 (mailing) Gold River, CA 95670
Redlands, CA 92373 [email protected]
[email protected] Phone: (610) 952-0634
Phone: (909) 798-7531
ARTICLE 6 – INSURANCE AND INDEMNIFICATION
3 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm

6.1 The following insurance coverage required by this Agreement shall be maintained by Consultant for the duration of its performance of the Services. Consultant shall not perform any Services unless and until the required insurance listed below is obtained by Consultant. Consultant shall provide City with certificates of insurance and endorsements evidencing such insurance prior to commencement of the Services. Insurance policies shall include a provision prohibiting cancellation or modification of the policy except upon thirty (30) days prior written notice to City.

A. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability insurance in the amount that meets statutory requirements with an insurance carrier acceptable to City, or certification to City that Consultant is self-insured or exempt from the workers’ compensation laws of the State of California. Consultant shall execute and provide City with Exhibit “ ,” titled “Workers’ Compensation Insurance Certification,” which is attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, prior to performance of the Services.

B. Comprehensive General Liability insurance with carriers acceptable to City in the minimum amount of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence and Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) aggregate, for public liability, property damage and personal injury is required. City shall be named as an additional insured and such insurance shall be primary and non-contributing to any insurance or self-insurance maintained by City.

C. Consultant shall secure and maintain professional liability insurance throughout the term of this Agreement in the amount of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per claim made and Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) in the aggregate.

D. Business Auto Liability coverage, with minimum limits of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence, combined single limit bodily injury liability and property damage liability. This coverage shall include all Consultant owned vehicles used in connection with Consultant’s provision of the Services, hired and non-owned vehicles, and employee non-ownership vehicles. City shall be named as an additional insured and such insurance shall be primary and non-contributing to any insurance or self-insurance maintained by City.

E. Consultant is expressly prohibited from assigning or subcontracting any of the Services without the prior written consent of City. In the event of mutual agreement by the Parties to assign or subcontract a portion of the Services, Consultant shall add such assignee or subcontractor as an additional insured to the insurance policies required hereby and provide City with the insurance endorsements prior to any Services being performed by the assignee or subcontractor.

6.2 Consultant shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless City and its elected and appointed officials, employees and agents from and against any and all claims, losses or liability, including attorneys’ fees, arising from injury or death to persons or damage to property occasioned by any negligent act or omission by, or the willful misconduct of, Consultant, or its officers, employees and agents in performing the Services. 4 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm ARTICLE 7 – CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

7.1 Consultant covenants and represents that it does not have any investment or interest in any real property that may be the subject of this Agreement or any other source of income, interest in real property or investment that would be affected in any manner or degree by the performance of Consultant’s Services. Consultant further covenants and represents that in the performance of its duties hereunder, no person having any such interest shall perform any Services under this Agreement.

7.2 Consultant agrees it is not a designated employee within the meaning of the Political Reform Act because Consultant:

A. Does not make a governmental decision whether to:
(i) approve a rate, rule or regulation, or adopt or enforce a City law; (ii) issue, deny, suspend or revoke any City permit, license, application, certification, approval, order or similar authorization or entitlement; (iii) authorize City to enter into, modify or renew a contract; (iv) grant City approval to a contract that requires City approval and to which City is a party, or to the specifications for such a contract; (v) grant City approval to a plan, design, report, study or similar item; (vi) adopt, or grant City approval of, policies, standards or guidelines for City or for any subdivision thereof.

B. Does not serve in a staff capacity with City and in that capacity, participate in making a governmental decision or otherwise perform the same or substantially the same duties for City that would otherwise be performed by an individual holding a position specified in City’s Conflict of Interest Code under Government Code section 87302.

7.3 In the event City determines that Consultant must disclose its financial interests, Consultant shall complete and file a Fair Political Practices Commission Form 700, Statement of Economic Interests, with the City Clerk’s office pursuant to the written instructions provided by the City Clerk.

ARTICLE 8 – GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

8.1 In the event any action is commenced to enforce or interpret any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement the prevailing Party shall, in addition to any costs and other relief, be entitled to the recovery of its reasonable attorneys’ fees, including fees for the use of in-house counsel by a Party.

8.2 Consultant shall not assign any of the Services, except with the prior written approval of City and in strict compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any 5 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm assignment or attempted assignment without such prior written consent may, in the sole discretion of City, result in City’s immediate termination of this Agreement.

8.3 Consultant is for all purposes under this Agreement an independent contractor and shall perform the Services as an independent contractor. Neither City nor any its agents shall have control over the conduct of Consultant or Consultant’s employees, except as herein set forth. Consultant shall supply all necessary tools and instrumentalities required to perform the Services. Assigned personnel employed by Consultant are for its account only, and in no event shall Consultant or personnel retained by it be deemed to have been employed by City or engaged by City for the account of, or on behalf of City. Consultant shall have no authority, express or implied, to act on behalf of City in any capacity whatsoever as an agent, nor shall Consultant have any authority, express or implied, to bind City to any obligation.

8.4 This Agreement may be terminated by City, in its sole discretion, by providing not less than five (5) days prior written notice to Consultant of City’s intent to terminate. If this Agreement is terminated by City, an adjustment to Consultant’s compensation shall be made, but (1) no amount shall be allowed for anticipated profit or unperformed Services, and (2) any payment due Consultant at the time of termination may be adjusted to the extent of any additional costs to City occasioned by any default by Consultant. Upon receipt of a termination notice, Consultant shall immediately discontinue its provision of the Services and, within five (5) days of the date of the termination notice, deliver or otherwise make available to City, copies (in both hard copy and electronic form, where applicable) of project related data, design calculations, drawings, specifications, reports, estimates, summaries and such other information and materials as may have been accumulated by Consultant in performing the Services. Consultant shall be compensated on a pro-rata basis for Services completed up to the date of termination.

8.5 Consultant shall maintain books, ledgers, invoices, accounts and other records and documents evidencing costs and expenses related to the Services for a period of three (3) years, or for any longer period required by law, from the date of final payment to Consultant pursuant to this Agreement. Such books shall be available at reasonable times for examination by City at the office of Consultant.

8.6 This Agreement, including the Exhibits incorporated herein by reference, represents the entire agreement and understanding between the Parties as to the matters contained herein, and any prior negotiations, written proposals or verbal agreements relating to such matters are superseded by this Agreement. Except as otherwise provided for herein, any amendment to this Agreement shall be in writing, approved by City and signed by City and Consultant.

8.7 This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without regard to its conflicts of laws provisions. The Parties agree that all actions or proceedings arising in connection with this Agreement shall be tried and litigated only in the state courts located in San Bernardino County, California, and the federal courts located in Riverside County, California. 6 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm

8.8 If one or more of the sentences, clauses, paragraphs or sections contained in this Agreement is declared invalid, void or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the same shall be deemed severable from the remainder of this Agreement and shall not affect, impair or invalidate the remaining sentences, clauses, paragraphs or sections contained herein, unless to do so would deprive a Party of a material benefit of its bargain under this Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, duly authorized representatives of City and Consultant have signed in confirmation of this Agreement.

CITY OF REDLANDS CIVIL & ENVIRONMENTAL
CONSULTANTS, INC.

By: ___________________________ By: _________________________ Mario Saucedo, Mayor Benjamin Arata, Principal
ATTEST:
___________________________
Jeanne Donaldson, City Clerk
7 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm EXHIBIT "A"

SCOPE OF SERVICES
Task 1 – General Arrangement Development Plan
The proposed flare system will be located on an undeveloped portion of the facility property located north and west of the existing flare station and north of the existing wastewater treatment facility drying beds. Consultant proposes to prepare a general arrangement plan for the City selected ZULE flare package. Consultant has assumed a preliminary flare compound area of approximately 1,500 square feet (SF) of available space for the proposed flare stack, gas blowers, air blower, programmable logic controller (PLC), condensate sump and utility infrastructure.

Consultant’s efforts in preparing the general arrangement development plan drawings consist of civil site engineering design, City provided survey information (topo, as-built site features and existing utilities), GCCS As-Built piping determinations, process piping alignment, interconnection of the WWTP DG and the existing GCCS LFG. Consultant will review City provided existing and any proposed utility infrastructure to develop an existing conditions site plan proximate to the proposed flare compound.

Consultant assumes the following:
• There is no need for land subdivision effort and the parcel has the proper zoning classification for this use;
• No CEQA (California Environmental Quality Act) or NSR (New Source Review), efforts will be completed as part of this project;
• No CUP (Conditional Use Permit) or local permitting is included in the scope of work provided;
• Off-site utility design is not required for this project. This includes, but is not limited to, electric, water, sewer, and gas service;
• The proposed facility will result in a total land disturbance of less than one (1) acre; and • Consultant does not include services to complete a wetland and stream delineation and associated reports.

For data provided to Consultant in AutoCAD drawing file (.dwg) format, Consultant requests that files reference a basis of bearings and vertical benchmark. In the event PDF drawings are provided, the referenced information will be identified as approximate. Consultant assumes that one (1) in-person site visit will be required as part of this task. 8 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm Consultant will provide information to identify critical locations and elevations required for the general arrangement development plan. The City is responsible to contract with the site surveyor.

Consultant may require the following information if not readily available from the City:
• Verify a minimum of three (3) existing ground control points based on the California State Planes, Zone 5, horizontal GRD coordinates, US Survey Feet NAD 83 (2011) per NGS data sheet EV9296 “BRYN RESET” and vertical datum will be referenced to a standardized datum (i.e., NGVD29). If information is provided in a local coordinate system relevant to the site and project location the associated conversion or shift must be provided.
• As an accurate as-built drawing of the existing flare equipment and GCCS system is not available, a 3D terrestrial scan of the existing landfill gas collection and control system components may be required at the City’s expense. If required, the Consultant will notify the City within 60 days of notice to proceed.
• If the 3D terrestrial scan is required, Consultant will extract certain key data points of the landfill gas collection and control system components from the City provided data.

This work would be limited to specific points and locations as directed by the design team and does not include the extraction, processing, or modeling of the entire data set. • The deliverable for this work would include a City provided point file with the coordinates and elevations of the extracted points, an AutoCAD file with the extracted points, and Consultant will present an exhibit, in portable document format (.pdf), depicting the extracted points (if required).
• Although not anticipated seasonal conditions and foliage/ground cover conditions are not an undue impediment to the completion of the survey. The City appointed surveyor will coordinate with Consultant to execute the required survey effort to include all requested information.
• The City Surveyor should be made available to document utilities and obstructions identified during Subsurface Utility Engineering efforts included in Task 4 – Geotechnical Engineering and Geotechnical Drilling.

The project schedule will allow the field portion of this survey to be conducted at a time where the project site area would not unduly obscure the ground surface, site improvements, and/or utilities. If the area to be surveyed is adversely impacted by either of the conditions stated above, the City shall be notified and a decision will be made as to whether the survey work will be initiated at a potentially higher cost and delayed schedule, or the start of fieldwork delayed until site conditions are remediated.

Task 2 – Detailed Site Integration Design of Selected Flare Consultant will prepare an existing conditions base map utilizing the recent topographic survey dated December 12, 2024, compiled by Aero Tech Surveys and provided by the City. Consultant 9 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm will utilize this to prepare a site layout/geometric and grading plan. This will reflect a minimum of two (2)- foot and ten (10)-foot contours.

Utilizing the topographic map, City provided as-built information (PDF’s), City provided general arrangement (CAD as provided to the City by John Zink Hamworthy Combustion) and terrestrial scanning (if required) site survey (described under Task 1), Consultant will develop a conceptual general arrangement development plan for City review and comment.

Development of the general arrangement drawings will be an iterative process involving review and input from the City. The conceptual general arrangement development plan is anticipated to include improvements for site access, the landfill biogas treatment system facility and associated pipework, schematic representation of drainage features, and other miscellaneous site features necessary to define the proposed work. Other site constraints, including easements, rights-ofway, existing utilities, zoning/setback requirements (if any), etc. will be reviewed during concept phase. Given site constraints, and if space permits vehicle access, Consultant will analyze vehicles movements to confirm if truck access is attainable to each component of the flare compound and provide exhibits illustrating vehicle movements.

Consultant will develop the general arrangement development plan drawings utilizing the existing conditions base map. Consultant will show the existing stormwater measures such as swales, culverts, trench drains, pipes, and/or inlet requirements to convey the stormwater runoff to the existing storm sewer system or regional stormwater management facilities. Existing landfill gas collection system process piping, dual containment force mains, and drainage pipe alignments, locations, material, and sizes will be indicated for interconnection purposes.

General arrangement plans will be developed to convey the overall spatial arrangement of the flare compound, system process equipment and piping for the designated interconnection. The scope of services for this task will also consist of an engineering evaluation and design services to determine the optimum location, arrangement, and alignment of the proposed flare compound.

The general arrangement development plan will present the orientation and locations of the proposed flare compound including but not limited to an enclosed flare (John Zink ZULE) 7’-0” Diameter x 40’-0” high stack, combustion air blower, two (2) gas blowers, knockout vessel, condensate sump, flame arrestor, landfill gas block valves, combustion flowmeters, biogas flowmeter, operational groupings, considering the space requirements for process piping interconnections.
10 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm

Flare Integration Design Example
The detailed design will utilize equipment plot dimensions prepared in CAD by John Zink Hamworthy Combustion Biogas Systems and provided by the City to the Consultant. Consultant anticipates that the flare stack will measure approximately 7’-0” in diameter and 40’-0” in height, while the air piping and combustion blower plot dimension will measure approximately 65’-0” in length and 8’-0” in width. Anticipated blower skid plot dimensions are approximately 20’-0” in length and 8’-0” in width. Consultant will finalize the design based on mutually agreed upon changes. Consultant will prepare construction level drawings, of sufficient detail, for obtaining bids from City-approved contractors.

Preliminary design of foundations and structures will be included to evaluate area and spacing requirements. The general arrangement development plan will present the equipment orientation, locations, alignment and interconnections of the required interconnection process piping and condensate drain lines and force mains, and include the following:
• Development of 2D equipment general arrangement development plan utilizing original equipment manufacturer (OEM) drawings showing relative layout within the process area boundaries.
• Enlarged process area arrangement drawings, as needed for clarification, using the overall process area general arrangement drawing.
• If 3D models of OEM equipment are available from the manufacturer, Consultant can include these models into a basic plant model to assist in evaluating issues with safety, operability, maintenance, and constructability. • Incorporation of the required structural, civil, key infrastructure and utilities that need to be considered for construction.
11 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm Deliverables: Final Design Drawings
• COVER SHEET
• GENERAL NOTES AND LEGEND
• EXISTING GCCS LAYOUT (if available from the City)
• EXISTING CONDITIONS
• PROPOSED CONDITION LAYOUT
• HEADER PLAN AND PROFILE
• FLARE COMPOUND LAYOUT
• DETAILS
• EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN
• EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN DETAILS
Task 3 – Structural Engineering
Consultant will subcontract with Response Structural Engineers (RSE). The subconsultant will provide structural calculations, foundation design, and anchorage schedule for the flare foundation, air blower foundation, gas blowers foundation, Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) cabinets and required pipe supports. Consultant will incorporate approved structural design drawings into Consultant’s final for construction drawing set.

Project Description:

Provide structural calculations, foundation, and anchorage schedule for Flare Foundation, Air Blower Foundation, Gas Blower Foundation, Pipe Supports. Shallow or Mat Foundations assumed, includes response to Consultant Comments Fee is based on the preliminary information outlined below.

Structural Scope Items:

Foundations, anchorage and piping support for items listed below.

Structural Exclusions:

Geotechnical, Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing (MEP) Designs.

Site Visits not included.
12 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm Preliminary Layout
Landfill Gas and Digester Gas Flare, Consisting of:
• Knockout Vessel, LS -100
• Digester Gas and Landfill Gas Blend Line.
• Knockout Vessel, LS-101, for Blended Digester Gas and Landfill Gas. • Two (2) Landfill Gas Blowers.
• One (1) Combustion Air Blower, 9,000 SCFM Capacity.
• One (1) Flame Arrestor.
• Two (2) Automatic Landfill Gas Block Valves.
• One (1) Biogas Flow Meter, with Recorder.
• One (l) Combustion Air Flow Meter, with Recorder.
• One (l) Enclosed Flare, John Zink, Model No. ZULE (Zink Ultra Low Emissions) or Equivalent, 31.6 MMBtu/hr (HHV), 7'-0" Diameter x 40'-0" High, Propane Pilot, Ground Level, with a Combustion Air Blower, Temperature Indicator and Recorder, Automatic Combustion Air Fuel Ratio Control, and UV Flame Scanner. • Two (2) Propane Vessels, V-102 and V-103, Used for Pilot Fuel.

Special Conditions:
• Site Visits not included in our structural fees.
• Fee assumes that RSE drawings can show anchor locations, specifications and details. • Detail references will be coordinated with overall plans by Civil Engineer. • RSE will work with the geotechnical engineer to come up with recommendations appropriate for this type of structure.
• Fee assumes that pertinent elevation data will be designed/provided by Civil Engineer.

This information will be used to set footing and superstructure height.

Task 4 – Geotechnical Engineering and Geotechnical Drilling 13 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm As part of the flare design, Consultant will subcontract with Converse Consultants (Converse) to perform a geotechnical investigation report. The investigation activities will obtain relevant data to the site integration of the flare station and blower skid package. The general arrangement of the flare compound is anticipated to be 8'-0" Wide x 85'-0" Long in plan dimension. It is anticipated that the equipment will be founded on a concrete mat foundation with loads of less than approximately 1,000 pounds per square foot. The flare station will be located outside of refuse.

It is the Consultant’s understanding that there is no existing geotechnical data available for the proposed location of the replacement flare. Groundwater at the site is estimated to exist at a depth of 100.0 feet. Soils are anticipated to consist of silty sand.

Project Set-Up
As part of the project set-up, staff personnel from Converse will conduct the following:
• Review as-built drawings and geotechnical report (if available). • Review geology and groundwater maps to assess the existing subsurface conditions. • Conduct a site reconnaissance and mark the boring locations. • Submit Converse field exploration plan for your review and approval. • Obtain any permits required by the City of Redlands (assume permit fees are waived). • Notify underground Service Alert (USA) at least 48 hours prior to drilling to clear the • boring locations of any conflict with existing underground utilities. • Coordinate the field investigation schedule with the City of Redlands. • Discuss specific requirements with the Structural Engineer.

Subsurface Exploration
Converses subsurface investigation will include drilling a total of one (1) exploratory boring to a maximum depth of 50.0 feet. If refusal is encountered on the first boring, an additional boring will be attempted. If required, a third boring can be performed with approval of a change order.

The actual boring locations will be determined in coordination with the Consultant and the City, based on accessibility of the drill rig, landfill operations and underground utilities.

The purpose of the boring will be to:
• Obtain subsurface information at the proposed flare station. • Obtain undisturbed and bulk samples of the various soil types for laboratory testing.

If refusal is encountered before the plan depth is reached, the boring will be terminated at that depth.

The boring will be drilled with a truck mounted rig, equipped with hollow stem auger, for soils sampling. Soils will be continuously logged and classified by the geologist/engineer in the field by visual examination in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System. 14 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm Alternate Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and ring soil samples will be collected at two (2) foot intervals in the upper 10 feet and then at five (5) feet intervals thereafter. SPT samplers will be collected in accordance with ASTM D1586 and ring-lined Modified California split- barrel samplers in accordance with ASTM D3550. Bulk samples of near surface soils and every major change of soil stratigraphy will also be collected from auger cuttings and placed in sealed plastic bags.

Modified California drive samples will be collected with a 3.0-inch outside diameter, 2.5-inch inside diameter split-barrel sampler, and a 2.42-inch inside diameter cutting shoe. The sample barrel will be with 18-inches of metal rings for sample collection and has an additional length of waste barrel. Stainless steel or brass liner rings for sample collection are one (1)-inch high, 2.42- inch inside diameter, and 2.5-inch outside diameter. Modified California drive samples will be retained in metal rings and placed in sealed plastic canisters to prevent loss of moisture.

SPT drive samples will be obtained using a two (2)-inch outside diameter, and 1.375-inch inside diameter split-spoon sampler without lining. The soils recovered from the SPT sampling will be stored in sealed plastic bags to preserve the natural moisture content.

At each sampling interval, the drive samplers will be fitted onto a sampling rod, lowered to the bottom of the boring, and driven 18 inches or to refusal (50 blows per 6 inches) with a 140- pound free-falling hammer, from a height of 30 inches, using an energy-calibrated hammer delivery system. Compared to SPT, the Modified California drive sampler provides less disturbed samples.

The borings will be backfilled with soil compacted by pushing down with augers, using the weight of the drill rig. Excess soil will be spread at the site.

Laboratory Testing
Soil samples obtained during exploratory drilling will be tested in Converse’s laboratory to evaluate their physical characteristics and engineering properties. Laboratory testing may include, but will not necessarily be limited to, the following:
• In-place moisture content;
• Soils corrosivity;
• Sieve analysis;
• Atterberg limits;
• Laboratory maximum density;
• Direct shear; and
• Consolidation.

Engineering Analyses and Geotechnical Report
A draft and a final geotechnical investigation report will be prepared for the project. The content of the report is listed below.
15 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm • Project description.
• Description of the streets along the pipe alignments. • A description of the field procedures used in the investigation. • A description of subsurface conditions and controlling engineering properties of the subsurface materials encountered, including documentation of the borings and sampling locations, and groundwater level.
• Evaluation of groundwater effects (if encountered) and the necessity for dewatering during construction. Dewatering recommendation is NOT part of this scope of work. • Discussion on the laboratory test results, including soil corrosivity. • Location of faults and potential impacts.
• Seismic design parameters based on 2022 California Building Code (CBC). • Compaction characteristics of soil types relative to their use as fill and backfill. • Geotechnical parameters for pad design, including bearing capacity. • Suitability of excavated materials for use as fill.
• Excavatability of soils.
• Lateral earth pressures.
• Since Converse does not practice in the area of corrosion engineering, our report will include typical soil corrosivity test results and general comments on the overall corrosivity of the soils. It will not include specific mitigation recommendation.

Geotechnical Engineering and Drilling Services Assumptions • The field work will be done in one mobilization during normal weekday working hours. • BORING LOCATION WILL BE DETERMINED BY CONVERSE IN
CONSULTATION WITH THE CONSULTANT AND THE CITY OF REDLANDS.

THE CITY OF REDLANDS MUST VERIFY THAT TO THE BEST OF THEIR

KNOWLEDGE NO UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES EXIST AT THE LOCATION OF THE PROPOSED BORING. CONVERSE WILL ALSO UTILIZE THE SERVICES OF A THIRD PARTY UNDERGROUND LOCATION SERVICE.
• Access to the job site will be available during normal weekday working hours at no additional cost to Consultant.
• Permit from the City of Redlands, if required.
• No traffic control required.
• No refuse will be encountered in our test boring.
• Level D protection will be required during our field investigation. • Boreholes will be backfilled with soils.
• One electronic pdf copy of the draft report will be submitted for review. Four hard copies of the report will be submitted, signed, and stamped by a registered Civil/Geotechnical Engineer (Converse)
• It is understood by both contracting parties that the design phase of the project ONLY drill rig subject to prevailing wage as defined in Labor Code Sections 1770-1780.

Task 5 – Electrical Engineering
16 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm Electrical design engineering work for the construction of a new flare will be performed by Consultant.

Consultant will review existing plans in detail and verify points of connection for the new flare in the field. After verification of field points, the subconsultant will prepare construction drawings. Consultant will incorporate the final electrical design work into construction level drawings.

Deliverables:
• Electrical Load List
• Single Line Diagrams
o Low Voltage
• Grounding Plans
• Conduit Plans
• Electrical Distribution Plans
• Panel Schedules
• Conduit and Cable Schedule (power, control, & network) with termination Information • Equipment Datasheets and Quote Review
o Low-voltage Switchboard
Task 6 – Permitting Assistance
The Consultant acknowledges that a revision to the existing Permit to Construct, issued by the SCAQMD on September 3, 2024, will be required. The revision pertains specifically to updates in the Equipment Description under Application No.616379.

The Consultant will support the City in preparing and submitting the amended permit application. This includes coordination with SCAQMD staff, preparation of the revised Permit Application Form, and incorporation of previously prepared supporting documentation. The City will provide the Consultant with the original SCAQMD application materials in advance of any scheduled meeting with the regulators.

The Consultant will submit the amended application package and respond to up to two (2) rounds of comments. Resubmissions will be made as necessary to obtain the revised Permit to Construct. It is assumed that the permitting fees will be paid directly by the City and are not included in the Consultant’s scope of services.

The Consultant has allocated a total of eight (8) hours for Principal-level support, 16 hours for Project Management, and 16 hours for Project Consultant services on a time-and-materials basis.

Should additional effort be required beyond these allocations, a Change Order will be submitted to the City for approval.

Task 7 – Bid Package
17 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm The Consultant will prepare a bid package for issuance to third-party contractors to perform the required construction work. This package will include the design documents developed under the preceding tasks, integrated with the City’s standard contract documents and a formal bid form.

Consultant will require the City to provide its standard contract documents in advance to include in the bid package.

The Consultant will participate in the pre-bid meeting, anticipated to be held via Microsoft Teams, and will respond to contractor inquiries received during the bidding period. Consultant will also support the City in evaluating contractor proposals and provide award recommendations.

Deliverables:
• Instruction to Bidders;
• Drawings/Plans from the work; and
• Specifications for the Work (Specifications Notes may be included within Drawings).

If available Consultant will incorporate the following City provided contracting documents:
• Construction Agreement;
• Standard General Conditions for Construction;
• Scope/Schedule/Price;
• Contractor’s Health & Safety;
• Insurance Requirements;
• Application for Payment;
• Change Order;
• Lien Release;
• Final Payment;
• Other Contract Administrative Forms;
• Distribution of the bid package up to five (5) qualified contractors; • Attendance at the pre-bid meeting via Microsoft Teams; • Preparation and submittal of meeting minutes from the pre-bid meeting; • Written responses to contractor questions submitted during the bidding process; and • Evaluation of contractor proposal and recommendation of award.

Assumptions
Consultant has assumed that the following information and documents will be made available prior to work being initiated:
• Flare design and Hazardous Area Classification design will be performed by others. The City will provide Consultant with most up-to-date enclosed flare design specifications. • Surveying is not included in Consultant’s scope of service and is the responsibility of the City of Redlands.
• All as-built drawings showing existing infrastructure, including utilities, which will impact the site layout, will be provided to the Consultant. • Drawings will be prepared using the Consultant CAD Standards .dwg file. 18 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm • The latest site topographic and planimetric information will be provided to the Consultant as an AutoCAD Civil 3D .dwg file.
• California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) is excluded from this scope of services. • Construction Management (CM) is excluded from this scope of services. • Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) is excluded from this scope of services. • The City is to pay all permit fees, unless the Consultant is otherwise directed and reimbursed in accordance with a direct cost markup of 12%. • Revisions to the site Title V permit or emissions limits at the site will not be required and are excluded from this scope of services.
• Emissions offsets, if required, will be purchased by the site. • The Consultant assumes there will be no modifications to Existing Site Area Classifications.
• The Consultant will only request three quotes for equipment. • The client will provide specifications for the network equipment as well as any corresponding network cabling.
• Wiring diagrams with termination information will be provided for the process equipment by the respective vendors.
• The Consultant will include control wiring terminations in the cable schedules for the equipment where termination details are provided by the vendor. 19 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm EXHIBIT "B"

PROJECT FEE SCHEDULE & HOURLY RATES
Task Description Estimated Total
01 Site Assessment and Existing Utility Review (Lump Sum) $13,000 02 Detailed Flare Design (Lump Sum) $88,500
03 Structural Engineering (Lump Sum) $40,500
04 Geotechnical Engineering – (Lump Sum) $30,000
05 Electrical Engineering (Lump Sum) $71,000
06 Permitting Assistance (T&M) $8,200
07 Bid Package (Lump Sum) $17,000
Total Estimate $268,200
Work will be invoiced monthly on a percent complete basis. If project conditions are different than those assumed herein, or additional services appear necessary during the execution of the project, Consultant will contact the City to discuss these conditions and obtain approvals before proceeding with additional services. Additional services will be invoiced on a time and materials basis using the Billable Hourly Rates Schedule of Fees provided below and will be valid through December 31, 2025.

Billable Hourly Rates:
2025 California Rate Sheet
New Rate
Vice-President $ 345.00
Senior Principal $ 303.00
Principal $ 281.00
Senior Consultant $ 263.00
Senior Project Manager $ 236.00
Project Manager III - Engineer $ 206.00
Project Manager III $ 206.00
Project Manager II $ 194.00
Project Manager $ 182.00
Project Manager I $ 182.00
Assistant Project Manager $ 175.00
Assistant Project Manager $ 175.00
Project Scientist $ 146.00
Project Consultant $ 146.00
Staff Consultant $ 135.00
Staff Scientist $ 135.00
Designer $ 126.00
20 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm 2025 California Rate Sheet (ctd.)
Senior Designer $ 126.00
Senior Technician $ 121.00
Survey Technician II $ 118.00
Cadd Technician $ 110.00
Cad Operator $ 110.00
Field Technician $ 101.00
GIS Analyst II $ 101.00
Survey Technician I $ 101.00
Office Manager $ 91.00
Seasonal Intern $ 89.00
Administrative $ 89.00
Secretary $ 89.00
21 I:\cmo\Agreements\Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY2526-033.doc-wm EXHIBIT " C "
WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE CERTIFICATION
Every employer, except the State, shall secure the payment of compensation in one or more of the following ways:
(a) By being insured against liability to pay compensation by one or more insurers duly authorized to write compensation insurance in this State. (b) By securing from the Director of Industrial Relations, a certificate of consent to self-insure, either as an individual employer, or as one employer in a group of employers, which may be given upon furnishing proof satisfactory to the Director of Industrial Relations of ability to self-insure and to pay any compensation that may become due to his or her employees.

CHECK ONE
_____I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to be insured against liability for Workers’ Compensation or to undertake selfinsurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work and activities required or permitted under this Agreement. (Labor Code §1861).
_____I affirm that at all times, in performing the work and activities required or permitted under this Agreement, I shall not employ any person in any manner such that I become subject to the workers’ compensation laws of California. However, at any time, if I employ any person such that I become subject to the workers’ compensation laws of California, immediately I shall provide the City with a certificate of consent to self-insure, or a certification of workers’ compensation insurance.

I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the information and representations made in this certificate are true and correct.

CIVIL & ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANTS, INC.

By: Date: ___________________

BENJAMIN ARATA, PRINCIPAL
Sole Source/ Single Source/ Standardization Form
For procurement of supplies, equipment and services valued at $5,000 and over NOTE: Every question must be answered with appropriate documentation attached; incomplete forms will be immediately rejected by Purchasing.

Date:_______________________
TO: Purchasing Division
FROM: ________________________________
Purchase Requisition # ___________________
Estimated Total Cost: $_________________
Proposed Vendor: ______________________
Request Term: _________________
This form must accompany the purchase document whenever an exception to the competitive process is requested. Requests for goods and/or services from a specific vendor or limited to a specific brand, where substitutes to the recommended vendor or brand are unacceptable, must be accompanied by a written justification explaining the circumstances that make alternatives unacceptable.

The City Manager will determine whether the justification is appropriate. Requests for exception must be supported by factual statements that will pass an audit.

Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc. FY 2025-26 7/29/25 FCS- Solid Waste Division 268,200 EXCEPTION TO BIDDING AND DISCLOSURE STATEMENT Page
Rev 1.31.19
2 INSTRUCTIONS

1. Please check all applicable categories (a. through i.) below and provide additional information where indicated.
a. The requested product is an integral repair part or accessory compatible with existing equipment.

Existing Equipment:

Manufacturer/Model Number:

Age:

Current Estimated Value:
b. The requested product has unique design/performance specifications or quality requirements that are not available in comparable products. c. I have standardized the requested product and the use of another brand/model would require considerable time and funding to evaluate.
d. The requested product is one in which I (and/or my staff) have specialized training and/or extensive expertise. Retraining would incur substantial cost in time and/or funding.
e. The requested product is used or demonstration equipment available at a lower-thannew cost. f. Repair/Maintenance service is available only from manufacturer or designated service representative.
g. Upgrade to or enhancement of existing software is available only from manufacturer. h. Service proposed by vendor is unique; therefore, competitive bids are not available or applicable.
i. Other factors (provide detailed explanation in #2 below).

2. Provide a detailed explanation and pertinent documentation for each category checked in item 1 above. Attach additional sheets if necessary:

Civil & Environmental Consultants (CEC) has been integrally involved in the design and permitting of the flare system at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant, including technical review of the SCAQMD permit, gas flow analysis, and system sizing. Their expertise and familiarity with the site-specific conditions, regulatory requirements, and the selected John Zink flare system make them uniquely qualified to complete the remaining scope of work. Continuing the task of integrating the new flare with CEC ensures continuity, protects the integrity of the design, and is in the best interest of the City.

EXCEPTION TO BIDDING AND DISCLOSURE STATEMENT Page
Rev 1.31.19
3 3. Was an evaluation of other equipment, products, or services performed? Yes No
If yes, please explain the type of evaluation performed and provide all supporting documentation:

4. List below the name of each individual who was involved in the evaluation, if conducted, and in making the recommendation to procure this product or service. Attach additional information, if necessary.

5. Explain what action(s) the department would take if the sole/single source services were no longer available

6. I certify that the above information is accurate to the best of my knowledge, and a signed copy of this document will be kept on file and available for audit in my department _________________________________________________________ Prepared by Date
_________________________________________________________ Department Director Date
Purchasing Approvals
______________________________________________________
Purchasing Agent Approval Date
_______________________________________________________ City Manager Approval Date
Tabitha Crocker, Louie Miranda Nathalie Ayala Digitally signed by Nathalie Ayala Date: 2025.07.29 13:27:07 -07'00' Tabitha Crocker Digitally signed by Tabitha Crocker Date: 2025.08.07 14:26:32 -07'00'
N/A
If CEC’s services were no longer available, the City would be required to issue a Request for Proposal and retain a new consultant. Transitioning to a new firm at this stage would likely cause significant delays, increased costs, and disruptions to regulatory compliance. Specifically, it would delay the integration of the flare system, impact the overall project schedule, and jeopardize regulatory alignment, as CEC’s work is directly tied to the approved SCAQMD permit. A change in consultant could potentially trigger a permit re-review process and increase the risk of noncompliance with air quality regulations. Furthermore, the selected ZULE flare system was chosen based on CEC’s technical input and coordination, making their continued involvement critical to ensure proper system integration.

Explanation Continued

2. Civil & Environmental Consultants (CEC) has been integrally involved in the design and permitting of the flare system at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant, including technical review of the SCAQMD permit, gas flow analysis, and system sizing. Their expertise and familiarity with the site-specific conditions, regulatory requirements, and the selected John Zink flare system make them uniquely qualified to complete the remaining scope of work. Continuing the task of integrating the new flare with CEC ensures continuity, protects the integrity of the design, and is in the best interest of the City.

5. If CEC’s services were no longer available, the City would be required to issue a Request for Proposal and retain a new consultant. Transitioning to a new firm at this stage would likely cause significant delays, increased costs, and disruptions to regulatory compliance. Specifically, it would delay the integration of the flare system, impact the overall project schedule, and jeopardize regulatory alignment, as CEC’s work is directly tied to the approved SCAQMD permit. A change in consultant could potentially trigger a permit re-review process and increase the risk of noncompliance with air quality regulations. Furthermore, the selected ZULE flare system was chosen based on CEC’s technical input and coordination, making their continued involvement critical to ensure proper system integration.

CEC Sole Source Justification
The City of Redlands engaged CEC to provide technical review and design support for the integration of the flare system at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant. CEC was initially retained by American Internation Environmental, Inc. (AIE) to conduct a third-party review of the SCAQMD Permit Application (No. 616379), including evaluation of the proposed flare design and its capacity to manage combined landfill and digester gas flows.

CEC’s involvement has since expanded to include detailed analysis of gas production projections, flare sizing, and operational parameters necessary to meet SCAQMD requirements. The SCAQMD permit directly affect the City selection of the Flare provider to correspond with the outlined flare design criteria. The City selected John Zink Hamworthy Combustion to minimize revisions to the SCAQMD permit. CEC’s familiarity with the site-specific conditions, regulatory framework, and technical specifications make them uniquely qualified to continue with the following tasks outlined:
• Task 1 - General Arrangement Development Plan
• Task 2 – Detailed Site Integration Design of Selected Flare • Task 3 – Structural Engineering
• Task 4 – Geotechnical Engineering and Geotechnical Drilling • Task 5 – Electrical Engineering
• Task 6 – Permitting Assistance
• Task 7 – Bid Package
The objective of the proposed project to integrate the City selected Zink Ultra Low Emissions Enclose Flare (ZULE) and replace the existing flare as the primary control device while maintaining operational compliance at the California Street Landfill and Wastewater Treatment Plant. CEC’s integral role in the development of the flare system, site design and permitting strategy, transitioning to a new consultant could result in significant delays, duplication of effort, and increased costs. To ensure continuity, maintain regulatory compliance, and preserve the integrity of the site integration design, sole sourcing CEC for the remaining scope is both justified and in the City’s best interest.

Please let me know if you have any questions.

Benjamin Arata | Principal
Civil & Environmental Consultants, Inc.
2356 Gold Meadow Way, Suite 120, Gold River, CA 95670
mobile 610-952-0634
www.cecinc.com
City Council Meeting J. 6.

DATE: 10/21/2025
TO: Honorable Mayor and City Council Members
SUBJECT: Consideration of a $725,210.49 purchase order modification with Enterprise FM Trust for the vehicle lease and maintenance program resulting in a total purchase order amount not to exceed $3,791,433.53 and a total contract amount not-to-exceed $8,519,823.38 (Facilities and Community Services Director Crocker) MOTION(S):

If the City Council determines that staff’s recommendation is appropriate, the following motion is provided:

I move to approve a $725,210.49 purchase order modification with Enterprise FM Trust for the vehicle lease and maintenance program, resulting in a total purchase order amount not to exceed $3,791,433.53 and a total contract amount not-to-exceed $8,519,823.38.

RECOMMENDATION:

Staff recommends that the City Council approve a $725,210.49 purchase order modification with Enterprise FM Trust for the vehicle lease and maintenance program, resulting in a total purchase order amount not to exceed $3,791,433.53 and a total contract amount not-to-exceed $8,519,823.38.

DISCUSSION:

The City of Redlands Equipment Maintenance Division oversees the maintenance of over 650 vehicles and equipment and the maintenance and operations of the City’s fuel station at the corporate yard. In July 2019, the City entered into a Master Equity Lease Agreement with Enterprise Fleet Management, Inc. for a light-duty and medium-duty vehicle lease and maintenance program.

This agreement has resulted in a structured and methodical vehicle replacement program. The goals of the program are to lower the average age of the fleet; achieve a reduction in net operating costs, as newer vehicles significantly lower maintenance expenses and have increased fuel efficiency; and improve the safety of staff operating city vehicles.

Staff recommends modifying the existing Purchase Order with Enterprise Fleet Management for the City’s vehicle lease program to carry forward unspent funds from Fiscal Year 2024-25 into Fiscal Year 2025-26. The unspent funds are attributable to vehicles ordered during Fiscal Year 2024-25 that have not yet been delivered and, therefore, were not invoiced within the prior fiscal year.

This action does not increase the overall spending authority previously approved by City Council but ensures that the remaining balance is available to support the ongoing vehicle lease program. Carrying forward these funds will allow the City to meet lease payment schedules, maintain continuity of fleet operations, and avoid delays in vehicle replacement cycles. This modification aligns with the City’s procurement and financial management practices by efficiently utilizing existing appropriations rather than requiring new allocations of funds.

ALTERNATIVES:

Council may elect not to approve the purchase order modification. However, this will greatly impact the operations of the affected departments.

STRATEGIC PLAN:

Not Applicable.

SUBMITTED BY:

Tabitha Crocker, Facilities and Community Services Director RECOMMENDED BY:

Charles M. Duggan Jr., City Manager
REVIEWED BY:

Christopher Boatman, Assistant City Manager
Janice McConnell, Assistant City Manager
Danielle Garcia, Management Services/Finance Director
Dana Abramovitz-Daniel, Procurement Manager
PREPARED BY:

Tricia Swope, Manager, Facilities and Community Services Fiscal Impact
Fiscal Year: FY 2025-26
Appropriation Required Y/N: N
Amount: $725,210.49
Budgeted Y/N: Y
Account No.: various
Discussion:

The original Fiscal Year 2025-26 Purchase Order with Enterprise Fleet Management for the vehicle lease program was approved by City Council on July 1, 2025, in the amount of $3,066,223.04. Staff recommends increasing the Purchase Order by $725,210.49 to carry forward unspent funds from Fiscal Year 2024-25, resulting in a new not-to-exceed total of $3,791,433.53. This modification represents a continuation of previously approved appropriations and does not require additional General Fund allocations.

Attachments
Purchase Order
Vendor
Bill To
Fiscal Year
Department
Purchase Order Date
Purchase Order Number
Required By
Ship To

VENDOR PHONE NUMBER VENDOR FAX NUMBER VENDOR NUMBER REQUISITION NUMBER BUYER NAME DELIVERY REFERENCE NOTES
ITEM # DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UOM UNIT PRICE EXTENDED PRICE

PURCHASE ORDER

ENTERPRISE FM TRUST

ENTERPRISE FLEET MANAGEMENT CUSTOMER BILLING
PO BOX 800089
KANSAS CITY, MO 64180

CITY OF REDLANDS
PO BOX 3005
REDLANDS, CA 92373
EMAIL: [email protected]
*Emailing invoice and referencing PO No.
is required and will expedite payment*
.

FINBIL
22650230

FACILITIES & COMMUNITY SERVICE
07/30/2025

THIS PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER MUST APPEAR ON
ALL INVOICES, PACKAGES, AND SHIPPING PAPERS.
07/01/2025
2026 Page 1 of 2
FCSD-Fleet Div
1270 W Park Ave
Building E
Redlands, CA 92373
FLEET
714-463-7631 12600343 Tricia Swope

FLEET - ENTERPRISE VEHICLE LEASE PROGRAM
ORDER TERM:

JULY 1, 2025 - JUNE 30, 2026.
.

NOT TO EXCEED DOLLAR AMOUNT IS PER YEAR. THIS PO WILL BE CLOSED WHEN THE TOTAL AMOUNT IS EXHAUSTED. .

PURCHASE ORDER WILL BE VALID ONLY WITH A CURRENT APPROVED MINIMUM LIABILITY COVERAGE ON FILE WITH RISK MANAGEMENT. .

PURCHASE ORDER AS PER CITY COUNCIL APPROVAL DATED JULY 1, 2025, PER MASTER EQUITY LEASE AGREEMENT, MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT, AND MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT & FLEET RENTAL AGREEMENT DATED JULY 2, 2019, AND PER SOURCELWELL CONTRACT NO. 030122-EFM DATED MAY 4, 2022. .
1 CMO HOMELESS SOLUTIONS MAINTENANCE 1.0000 EA $1,050.3600 $1,050.36 2 CMO HOMELESS SOLUTIONLS LEASE 1.0000 EA $20,513.8400 $20,513.84 3 DSD BUILDING & SAFETY MAINTENANCE 1.0000 EA $1,049.5200 $1,049.52 4 DSD BUILDING & SAFETY LEASE 1.0000 EA $16,076.1200 $16,076.12 5 DSD PLANNING MAINTENANCE 1.0000 EA $380.0400 $380.04
6 DSD PLANNING LEASE 1.0000 EA $5,443.3600 $5,443.36
7 LIBRARY MAINTENANCE 1.0000 EA $615.7200 $615.72
8 LIBRARY LEASE 1.0000 EA $11,332.1800 $11,332.18
9 PD MAINTENANCE 1.0000 EA $4,345.6800 $4,345.68
10 PD LEASE 1.0000 EA $93,292.2800 $93,292.28
11 PD LEASE MEASURE T 1.0000 EA $917,652.0000 $917,652.00 12 FIRE MAINTENANCE 1.0000 EA $2,558.1600 $2,558.16
13 FIRE LEASE 1.0000 EA $245,048.2500 $245,048.25
14 FCS ADMIN MAINTENANCE MEASURE T 1.0000 EA $1,300.2000 $1,300.20 15 FCS ADMIN LEASE MEASURE T 1.0000 EA $23,978.5200 $23,978.52 PROCUREMENT MANAGER Purchase Order Total
Total Ext. Price $3,066,223.04
$3,066,223.04
PURCHASING DIVISION - 1270 W. PARK AVE. REDLANDS, CA 92373 - Email: [email protected]

PLEASE SEE ATTACHED PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS

CITY OF REDLANDS

PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS
unless otherwise specified in an executed agreement, the following shall apply

1. INVOICES: Each purchase order is to be invoiced separately and all invoices shall be submitted to the billing address as shown on the front of the Purchase Order. All invoices, shipping documents, correspondence, and-related papers must have the purchase order number and consignee shown clearly in their face.

2. PACKAGING AND DRAYAGE: Unless so specified on the Purchase Order and evidenced by a copy of the freight bill attached to the invoice, there shall be no charge to the City for either packaging and/or drayage

3. INSPECTION: All materials and workmanship provided under the terms of the Purchase Order are subject to inspection and test by the City to ensure compliance with the requirements and specifications contained therein. In the event that the goods or services delivered are defective, or are not in conformity with the Purchase Order, the City shall have the right to either reject said goods or services, or require that they be corrected or otherwise brought into conformity with the terms set forth in the Purchase Order.

4. RESPONSIBILITIES: Unless otherwise specified in the Purchase Order, the supplier/contractor shall be responsible for all items covered in said Purchase Order until delivered at the designated delivery point and thereafter accepted by the City. Supplier/contractor shall bear all risks as the goods and services provided until they are finally accepted by the City. Upon the City’s notice to supplier/contractor of its rejection of the goods or services provided or the need for the correction thereof. All such defective goods or services shall be removed from City premises, and any and all expenses incurred in the removal and/or correction of such defective goods or services shall be borne entirely by the supplier/contractor.

5. ACCEPTANCE: The City’s final acceptance of the goods or services provided under the Purchase Order shall be conclusive except in those instances where a latent defect or fraud is subsequently discovered, or when a supplier/contractor has committed such gross mistakes that they are tantamount to a fraud. The City’s failure to inspect and either accept or reject the goods or services delivered shall not relieve the supplier/contractor for the responsibility for strict compliance with the terms and specifications of the Purchase Order.

6. CHANGES: This Purchase Order may, at any time, be changed with regard to the materials or services to be furnished, the quantity ordered, the unit price, discount, delivery point or arrangements, terms or any other matters affecting a valid order. However, in order to be effective, any such change or amendment causes an increase or decrease in the cost of performance hereunder, an equitable adjustment shall be made to reflect the increase or the decrease in the cost thereof. Any such adjustment shall be subject to the written approval of the Purchasing Agent. No variation in the quality, quantity, or coat of any item called for by this Purchase Order Shall be acceptable by the City except in pursuance of a written Change Order approved by the Purchasing Agent.

7. TERMINATION: This Purchase Order may be terminated, in whole or in part, at any time, by written notice to the supplier/contractor. Such termination shall be effective with respect to the quantity, manner, and time specified in such notice. The City shall be liable at the stipulated price only for such materials and/or services as have been delivered and/or rendered and accepted as of the effective date of said written notice. The City shall not be liable for any excess cost arising out of such termination, and failure of the supplier/contractor to cease delivery and/or work upon receipt of such termination notice shall not occasion a claim for extra costs.

8. TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE: In the event that the supplier/contractor fails to perform this Purchase Order within the time specified, the Purchasing Agent may, by written notice, order the supplier/contractor to cease further deliveries and may hold the supplier/contractor liable for any damages caused to the City by reason of such delay. If no time is specified, it is expected that the supplier/contractor shall begin performance within a reasonable time after placement of the order. The City may extend periods of performance if the facts as to the cause of the delay, in sole opinion of the Purchasing Agent, justify such an extension.

9. LIABILTIY: The supplier/contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the City, its elected officials, officers, employees, and agents from all claims, losses, damages, costs, expenses and suits, in law or in equity, because of personal injury, property damage, or alleged or actual patent infringements, based on the performance of this Purchase Order or asserted against it. Further, supplier/contractor warrants that the City shall not be responsible for any damages that may be claimed by reason or death injury of the person of the supplier/contractor’s officer, agents, employees, invitees or licensees or for damage to any property of the supplier/contractor or any other damage that may arise or result at anytime because of personal injury or damage to property sustained by any other person or persons, which may have been caused or contributed by proximately or otherwise by reason of, or in course of, carrying out this Purchase Order.

10. DISPUTES: All disputes concerning questions of fact which may arise under this Purchase Order under this Purchase Order, and not disposed of by mutual agreement and/or consent, shall be decided by the sole discretion of the Purchasing Agent. All disputes concerning questions of law, which may arise under this Purchase Order, shall be decided under applicable laws of the State of California.

11. PAYMENTS: Payments shall be made upon submission of an itemized invoice, presented in duplicate of the prices stipulated in the Purchase Order and within 30 days of becoming due for supplies delivered and accepted or services rendered and accepted, less deductions if any. When requested by the supplier/contractor, payment on partial deliveries may be made whenever, in the sole discretion of the Purchasing Agent, the surrounding circumstances warrant such partial payment. In the event and, if for any reason, an overpayment is made; the City requires prompt refund of said overpayment by way of supplier/contactor’s properly referenced check.

12. LICENSOR: All supplier/contractors who perform work within the City, must have on file at the Redlands City Revenue Office, a current and valid city business license.

13. CONFORMITY WITH SAFETY ORDERS: The goods and/or services covered by this Purchase Order or contract must conform to the safety order of OSHA, CAL-OSHA, and/or NIOSHA and any and all applicable material safety data sheets (MSDS).

14. PREVAILING WAGES: When applicable, the City is subject to the State of California prevailing wage laws as set forth in California Labor Code Section 1770 et seq. The contractor is responsible for determining the appropriate Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) classification for the various employees and subcontractors used for a particular project or service. The rates for each classification are posted on the DIR website at http://www.dir.ca.gov/DIRdatabases.html. All contractors performing work for the City are responsible for abiding by all applicable prevailing wage laws, and must furnish the City with Certified Payroll Records upon request.

ITEM # DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UOM UNIT PRICE EXTENDED PRICE

Page 2 of 2 ends

Redlands City CouncilOctober 21, 2025

Redlands City Council
October 21, 2025